AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

C TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION AT B

AT

E
CONTENTS
INDEX FOR DTC ........................................................ 5 Fail-Safe ................................................................. 41 F
Alphabetical Index .................................................... 5 How To Perform Trouble Diagnosis For Quick and
DTC No. Index ......................................................... 6 Accurate Repair ...................................................... 43
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 7 A/T Electrical Parts Location .................................. 48 G
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System Circuit Diagram ....................................................... 49
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis .................... 50
SIONER” .................................................................. 7 Check Before Engine is Started .............................. 54
H
Precautions for Battery Service ................................ 7 Check at Idle ........................................................... 54
Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Cruise Test - Part 1 ................................................. 55
of A/T and Engine .................................................... 7 Cruise Test - Part 2 ................................................. 57
Precautions for TCM, A/T Assembly and Control Cruise Test - Part 3 ................................................. 58 I
Valve Assembly Replacement .................................. 8 Vehicle Speed When Shifting Gears ...................... 59
Precautions .............................................................. 9 Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing
Service Notice or Precautions ................................ 10 Complete Lock-Up .................................................. 59 J
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis ................ 10 Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing
PREPARATION ..........................................................11 Slip Lock-Up ........................................................... 59
Special Service Tools ..............................................11 Symptom Chart ....................................................... 60
K
Commercial Service Tools ...................................... 12 TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values ........... 83
A/T FLUID ................................................................. 13 CONSULT-II ............................................................ 86
Changing A/T Fluid ................................................ 13 Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT-II ........... 96
Checking A/T Fluid ................................................. 13 DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE .............. 98 L
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM .......................................... 15 Description .............................................................. 98
Cross-Sectional View ............................................. 15 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................... 98
Shift Mechanism ..................................................... 16 Possible Cause ....................................................... 98 M
TCM Function ......................................................... 27 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................. 98
CAN Communication .............................................. 28 Wiring Diagram — AT — CAN ................................ 99
Input/Output Signal of TCM .................................... 30 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 100
Line Pressure Control ............................................ 31 DTC P0615 START SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................... 101
Shift Control ........................................................... 32 Description ............................................................ 101
Lock-Up Control ..................................................... 33 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 101
Engine Brake Control ............................................. 35 Possible Cause ..................................................... 101
Control Valve .......................................................... 35 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 101
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM ............ 37 Wiring Diagram — AT — STSIG .......................... 102
Introduction ............................................................ 37 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 103
OBD-II Function for A/T System ............................. 37 DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH. 105
One or Two Trip Detection Logic of OBD-II ............ 37 Description ............................................................ 105
OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) ................. 37 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 105
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ........................... 40 Possible Cause ..................................................... 105
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ............................................ 41 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 105
DTC Inspection Priority Chart ................................ 41 Wiring Diagram — AT — PNP/SW ....................... 106

Revision; 2004 April AT-1 2003 G35 Coupe

 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 107 (ROM) ...................................................................... 140
Component Inspection .......................................... 109 Description ............................................................ 140
DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REV- On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 140
OLUTION SENSOR) ............................................... 110 Possible Cause ..................................................... 140
Description ............................................................ 110 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 140
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 110 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 141
Possible Cause ..................................................... 110 DTC P1704 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 110 (EEPROM) ............................................................... 142
Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSA/T ..........................111 Description ............................................................ 142
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 112 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 142
DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL ................... 115 Possible Cause ..................................................... 142
Description ............................................................ 115 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 142
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 115 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 143
Possible Cause ..................................................... 115 DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR ........ 144
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 115 Description ............................................................ 144
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 115 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 144
DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH Possible Cause ..................................................... 144
SOLENOID VALVE ................................................. 117 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 144
Description ............................................................ 117 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 144
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 117 DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 117 CIRCUIT .................................................................. 146
Possible Cause ..................................................... 117 Description ............................................................ 146
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 117 CONSULT-II Reference Value ............................... 146
Wiring Diagram — AT — TCV .............................. 118 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 146
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 119 Possible Cause ..................................................... 146
Component Inspection .......................................... 121 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 146
DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP). 122 Wiring Diagram — AT — FTS ............................... 147
Description ............................................................ 122 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 148
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 122 Component Inspection .......................................... 151
Possible Cause ..................................................... 122 DTC P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR .... 152
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 122 Description ............................................................ 152
Wiring Diagram — AT — TCCSIG ........................ 123 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 152
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 124 Possible Cause ..................................................... 152
Component Inspection .......................................... 126 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 152
DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE. 127 Wiring Diagram — AT — TRSA/T ......................... 153
Description ............................................................ 127 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 154
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 127 DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR ....... 157
Possible Cause ..................................................... 127 Description ............................................................ 157
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 127 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 157
Wiring Diagram — AT — LPSV ............................ 128 Possible Cause ..................................................... 157
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 129 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 157
Component Inspection .......................................... 131 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 157
DTC P1701 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE DTC P1730 A/T INTERLOCK ................................. 159
(POWER SUPPLY) .................................................. 132 Description ............................................................ 159
Description ............................................................ 132 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 159
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 132 Possible Cause ..................................................... 159
Possible Cause ..................................................... 132 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 159
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 132 Wiring Diagram — AT — I/LOCK .......................... 160
Wiring Diagram — AT — POWER ........................ 133 Judgement of A/T Interlock ................................... 164
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 135 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 164
Component Inspection .......................................... 137 DTC P1731 A/T 1ST ENGINE BRAKING ............... 166
DTC P1702 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE Description ............................................................ 166
(RAM) ...................................................................... 138 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 166
Description ............................................................ 138 Possible Cause ..................................................... 166
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 138 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 166
Possible Cause ..................................................... 138 Wiring Diagram — AT — E/BRE ........................... 167
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 138 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 168
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 139 DTC P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE . 170
DTC P1703 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE Description ............................................................ 170

Revision; 2004 April AT-2 2003 G35 Coupe

 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 170 Possible Cause ..................................................... 203
Possible Cause .................................................... 170 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 203 A
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 170 Wiring Diagram — AT — HLR/CF ........................ 204
Wiring Diagram — AT — I/C ................................ 171 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 205
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 172 DTC P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID B
Component Inspection ......................................... 174 VALVE ..................................................................... 208
DTC P1754 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE Description ............................................................ 208
FUNCTION .............................................................. 175 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 208
Description ........................................................... 175 Possible Cause ..................................................... 208 AT
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 175 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 208
Possible Cause .................................................... 175 Wiring Diagram — AT — LC/B ............................. 209
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 175 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 210 D
Wiring Diagram — AT — I/CF .............................. 176 Component Inspection .......................................... 212
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 177 DTC P1774 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID
DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE . 179 VALVE FUNCTION .................................................. 213 E
Description ........................................................... 179 Description ............................................................ 213
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 179 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 213
Possible Cause .................................................... 179 Possible Cause ..................................................... 213
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 179 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 213 F
Wiring Diagram — AT — FR/B ............................. 180 Wiring Diagram — AT — LC/BF ........................... 214
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 181 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 215
Component Inspection ......................................... 183 DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH .................. 217 G
DTC P1759 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE Description ............................................................ 217
FUNCTION .............................................................. 184 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Description ........................................................... 184 . 217 H
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 184 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 217
Possible Cause .................................................... 184 Possible Cause ..................................................... 217
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 184 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 217
I
Wiring Diagram — AT — FR/BF ........................... 185 Wiring Diagram — AT — MMSW ......................... 218
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 186 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 219
DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE. 189 Component Inspection .......................................... 220
Description ........................................................... 189 Position Indicator Lamp ........................................ 220 J
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 189 DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1 ............... 221
Possible Cause .................................................... 189 Description ............................................................ 221
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 189 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 221 K
Wiring Diagram — AT — D/C ............................... 190 Possible Cause ..................................................... 221
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 191 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 221
Component Inspection ......................................... 193 Wiring Diagram — AT — FPSW1 ......................... 222 L
DTC P1764 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 223
FUNCTION .............................................................. 194 DTC P1843 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 3 ............... 225
Description ........................................................... 194 Description ............................................................ 225
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 194 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 225 M
Possible Cause .................................................... 194 Possible Cause ..................................................... 225
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 194 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 225
Wiring Diagram — AT — D/CF ............................. 195 Wiring Diagram — AT — FPSW3 ......................... 226
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 196 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 227
DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5 ............... 229
SOLENOID VALVE ................................................. 198 Description ............................................................ 229
Description ........................................................... 198 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 229
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 198 Possible Cause ..................................................... 229
Possible Cause .................................................... 198 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 229
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 198 Wiring Diagram — AT — FPSW5 ......................... 230
Wiring Diagram — AT — HLR/C .......................... 199 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 231
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 200 DTC P1846 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 6 ............... 233
Component Inspection ......................................... 202 Description ............................................................ 233
DTC P1769 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 233
SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION ............................. 203 Possible Cause ..................................................... 233
Description ........................................................... 203 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 233
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 203

Revision; 2004 April AT-3 2003 G35 Coupe

 Wiring Diagram — AT — FPSW6 ......................... 234 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE .......................................... 294
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 235 Control Valve Assembly ........................................ 294
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION, MANUAL MODE, Rear Oil Seal ......................................................... 300
BRAKE AND THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CIR- Parking Components ............................................ 301
CUIT ........................................................................ 237 AIR BREATHER HOSE ........................................... 307
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 237 Removal and Installation ....................................... 307
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS ............ 239 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY ................................. 308
Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC ...................... 239 Removal and Installation ....................................... 308
A/T CHECK Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On . 241 OVERHAUL ............................................................. 311
Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” or “N” Position . 243 Components .......................................................... 311
In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves When Pushed ...... 243 Oil Channel ........................................................... 317
In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves .............................. 245 Locations of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings,
Large Shock (“N” to “D” Position) ......................... 246 Thrust Washers and Snap Rings .......................... 318
Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position. 249 DISASSEMBLY ....................................................... 319
Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position . 251 Disassembly .......................................................... 319
Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 ..................... 255 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS ...................... 334
A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 ................................ 257 Oil Pump ............................................................... 334
A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3 ................................ 259 Front Sun Gear, 3rd One-Way Clutch ................... 336
A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4 ................................ 262 Front Carrier, Input Clutch, Rear Internal Gear ..... 339
A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D5 ................................ 264 Mid Sun Gear, Rear Sun Gear, High and Low
A/T Does Not Perform Lock-Up ............................ 266 Reverse Clutch Hub .............................................. 344
A/T Does Not Hold Lock-Up Condition ................. 269 High and Low Reverse Clutch .............................. 349
Lock-Up Is Not Released ...................................... 270 Direct Clutch ......................................................... 350
Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle ................ 271 ASSEMBLY ............................................................. 352
Cannot Be Changed to Manual Mode .................. 272 Assembly (1) ......................................................... 352
A/T Does Not Shift: 5th Gear → 4th Gear ............ 273 Adjustment ............................................................ 363
A/T Does Not Shift: 4th Gear → 3rd Gear ............ 275 Assembly (2) ......................................................... 365
A/T Does Not Shift: 3rd Gear → 2nd Gear ........... 277 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .... 371
A/T Does Not Shift: 2nd Gear → 1st Gear ............ 279 General Specifications .......................................... 371
Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake .... 281 Vehicle Speed When Shifting Gears ..................... 371
SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM .................................... 283 Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing
Control Device Removal and Installation .............. 283 Complete Lock-Up ................................................ 371
Adjustment of A/T Position ................................... 284 Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing
Checking of A/T Position ...................................... 284 Slip Lock-Up .......................................................... 371
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM ..................................... 286 Stall Speed ............................................................ 371
Description ............................................................ 286 Line Pressure ........................................................ 372
Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location ......... 286 Solenoid Valves .................................................... 372
Wiring Diagram — AT — SHIFT ........................... 287 A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor .............................. 372
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 288 Turbine Revolution Sensor .................................... 372
KEY INTERLOCK CABLE ...................................... 291 Vehicle Speed Sensor A/T (Revolution Sensor) ... 372
Components ......................................................... 291 Reverse Brake ...................................................... 373
Removal ............................................................... 292 Total End Play ....................................................... 373
Installation ............................................................. 293

Revision; 2004 April AT-4 2003 G35 Coupe

 INDEX FOR DTC

INDEX FOR DTC PFP:00024

A
Alphabetical Index ACS002AD

NOTE:
If DTC U1000 is displayed with other DTCs, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to B
AT-98 .
DTC
Items OBD-II Except OBD-II AT
Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
CONSULT-II CONSULT-II
GST*1 only “A/T”
A/T 1ST E/BRAKING — P1731 AT-166 D
ATF PRES SW 1/CIRC — P1841 AT-221
ATF PRES SW 3/CIRC — P1843 AT-225
E
ATF PRES SW 5/CIRC — P1845 AT-229
ATF PRES SW 6/CIRC — P1846 AT-233
A/T INTERLOCK P1730 P1730 AT-159 F
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN P0744 P0744 AT-122
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC P0710 P1710 AT-146
G
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 U1000 AT-98
D/C SOLENOID/CIRC P1762 P1762 AT-189
D/C SOLENOID FNCTN P1764 P1764 AT-194 H
ENGINE SPEED SIG P0725 P0725 AT-115
FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC P1757 P1757 AT-179
I
FR/B SOLENOID FNCT P1759 P1759 AT-184
HLR/C SOL/CIRC P1767 P1767 AT-198
HLR/C SOL FNCTN P1769 P1769 AT-203 J
I/C SOLENOID/CIRC P1752 P1752 AT-170
I/C SOLENOID FNCTN P1754 P1754 AT-175
L/PRESS SOL/CIRC P0745 P0745 AT-127 K
LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC P1772 P1772 AT-208
LC/B SOLENOID FNCT P1774 P1774 AT-213
L
MANU MODE SW/CIR — P1815 AT-217
PNP SW/CIRC P0705 P0705 AT-105
STARTER RELAY/CIRC — P0615 AT-101 M
TCC SOLENOID/CIRC P0740 P0740 AT-117
TCM·EEPROM — P1704 AT-142
TCM-POWER SUPPLY — P1701 AT-132
TCM·RAM — P1702 AT-138
TCM·ROM — P1703 AT-140
TP SEN/CIRC A/T P1705 P1705 AT-144
TURBINE REV S/CIRC P1716 P1716 AT-152
VEH SPD SE/CIR·MTR — P1721 AT-157
VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT P0720 P0720 AT-110

*1: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012.

Revision; 2004 April AT-5 2003 G35 Coupe

 INDEX FOR DTC

DTC No. Index ACS002AE

NOTE:
If DTC U1000 is displayed with other DTCs, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to
AT-98 .
DTC
OBD-II Except OBD-II Items
Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
CONSULT-II CONSULT-II
GST*1 only “A/T”
— P0615 STARTER RELAY/CIRC AT-101
P0705 P0705 PNP SW/CIRC AT-105
P0710 P1710 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC AT-146
P0720 P0720 VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT AT-110
P0725 P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIG AT-115
P0740 P0740 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC AT-117
P0744 P0744 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN AT-122
P0745 P0745 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC AT-127
— P1701 TCM-POWER SUPPLY AT-132
— P1702 TCM·RAM AT-138
— P1703 TCM·ROM AT-140
— P1704 TCM·EEPROM AT-142
P1705 P1705 TP SEN/CIRC A/T AT-144
P1716 P1716 TURBINE REV S/CIRC AT-152
— P1721 VEH SPD SE/CIR·MTR AT-157
P1730 P1730 A/T INTERLOCK AT-159
— P1731 A/T 1ST E/BRAKING AT-166
P1752 P1752 I/C SOLENOID/CIRC AT-170
P1754 P1754 I/C SOLENOID FNCTN AT-175
P1757 P1757 FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC AT-179
P1759 P1759 FR/B SOLENOID FNCT AT-184
P1762 P1762 D/C SOLENOID/CIRC AT-189
P1764 P1764 D/C SOLENOID FNCTN AT-194
P1767 P1767 HLR/C SOL/CIRC AT-198
P1769 P1769 HLR/C SOL FNCTN AT-203
P1772 P1772 LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC AT-208
P1774 P1774 LC/B SOLENOID FNCT AT-213
— P1815 MANU MODE SW/CIRC AT-217
— P1841 ATF PRES SW 1/CIRC AT-221
— P1843 ATF PRES SW 3/CIRC AT-225
— P1845 ATF PRES SW 5/CIRC AT-229
— P1846 ATF PRES SW 6/CIRC AT-233
U1000 U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT AT-98

*1: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012.

Revision; 2004 April AT-6 2003 G35 Coupe

 PRECAUTIONS

PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001
A
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER” ACS002AF

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along B
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front AT
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Man-
ual.
WARNING: D
● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be per-
formed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. E
● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to per-
sonal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section. F
● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
G
Precautions for Battery Service ACS006HA

Before disconnecting the battery, lower both the driver and passenger windows. This will prevent any interfer-
ence between the window edge and the vehicle when the door is opened/closed. During normal operation, the H
window slightly raises and lowers automatically to prevent any window to vehicle interference. The automatic
window function will not work with the battery disconnected.
I
Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of A/T and Engine ACS002AG

The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the
driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration. J
CAUTION:
● Be sure to turn the ignition switch “OFF” and disconnect the negative battery cable before any
repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves,
etc. will cause the MIL to light up. K
● Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MIL to light up due to an open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease,
dirt, bent terminals, etc.) L
● Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. Interference of the harness with a
bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to a short circuit.
● Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube M
may cause the MIL to light up due to a malfunction of the EGR system or fuel injection system, etc.
● Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the TCM and
ECM before returning the vehicle to the customer.

Revision; 2004 April AT-7 2003 G35 Coupe

 PRECAUTIONS

Precautions for TCM, A/T Assembly and Control Valve Assembly Replacement
ACS002AH

CAUTION:
● Check data (Unit ID) in TCM with data monitor of CONSULT-II before replacing A/T assembly or
control valve assembly.
● Check if new data (Unit ID) are entered correctly after replacing A/T assembly or control valve
assembly and erasing data in TCM.
● When replacing A/T assembly, control valve assembly or TCM, refer to the pattern table below and erase
the EEPROM in the TCM if necessary.
EEPROM ERASING PATTERNS
A/T assembly or control
TCM Erasing EEPROM in TCM Remarks
valve assembly
Not required because the EEPROM in the TCM is in
Replaced Replaced Not required
the default state.
Not required because the EEPROM in the TCM is in
Not replaced Replaced Not required
the default state.
Required because data has been written in the
EEPROM in the TCM and because the TCM cannot
Replaced Not replaced Required
write data from the ROM assembly in the transmis-
sion.

METHOD FOR ERASING THE EEPROM IN THE TCM

1. Connect CONSULT-II to data link connector.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON” . Confirm that CONSULT-II turn “ON”.
3. Move selector lever in “R” position.
4. Touch “START” on CONSULT-II.
5. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
6. Fully press the accelerator pedal (8/8 throttle), and hold it in the fully open position. (This will set the
closed throttle position signal to “OFF”.)
7. Touch “ERASE” on CONSULT-II, and then touch “YES”.
8. Wait 3 seconds and then release the accelerator pedal.
9. Turn ignition switch “OFF” position.
METHOD FOR WRITING DATA FROM THE ROM ASSEMBLY IN THE TRANSMISSION
In the following procedure, the TCM reads data from the ROM assembly and writes it to the EEPROM in the
TCM.
1. With the EEPROM in the TCM erased.
2. Move selector lever in “P” position.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON” .
CHECK METHOD
● Normal: About 2 seconds after the ignition switch “ON”, the A/T CHECK indicator lamp lights up for 2
seconds.
● Abnormal: Even after the ignition switch “ON”, the A/T CHECK indicator lamp does not light up after 2 sec-
onds or illuminates immediately.
Cope for abnormal
● Replace the control valve assembly.
● Replace the TCM.

Revision; 2004 April AT-8 2003 G35 Coupe

 PRECAUTIONS

Precautions ACS002AI

A
● Before connecting or disconnecting the TCM harness con-
nector, turn ignition switch “OFF” and disconnect negative
battery cable. Because battery voltage is applied to TCM
even if ignition switch is turned “OFF”. B

AT

D
SEF289H

● When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or E

from TCM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or
break).
Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on TCM
pin terminal, when connecting pin connectors. F

SEF291H
H

● Before replacing TCM, perform TCM input/output signal

inspection and make sure whether TCM functions properly I
or not. AT-83, "TCM INSPECTION TABLE".

MEF040DA

L
● After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform
“DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE”. M
If the repair is completed the DTC should not be displayed
in the “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”.

SEF217U

● Always use the specified brand of A/T fluid. Refer to MA-9, "Fluids and Lubricants" .
● Use paper rags not cloth rags during work.
● After replacing the A/T fluid, dispose of the waste oil using the methods prescribed by law, ordinance, etc.
● Before proceeding with disassembly, thoroughly clean the outside of the transaxle. It is important to pre-
vent the internal parts from becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter.
● Disassembly should be done in a clean work area.

Revision; 2004 April AT-9 2003 G35 Coupe

 PRECAUTIONS

● Use lint-free cloth or towels for wiping parts clean. Common shop rags can leave fibers that could interfere
with the operation of the transaxle.
● Place disassembled parts in order for easier and proper assembly.
● All parts should be carefully cleaned with a general purpose, non-flammable solvent before inspection or
reassembly.
● Gaskets, seals and O-rings should be replaced any time the transaxle is disassembled.
● It is very important to perform functional tests whenever they are indicated.
● The valve body contains precision parts and requires extreme care when parts are removed and serviced.
Place disassembled valve body parts in order for easier and proper assembly. Care will also prevent
springs and small parts from becoming scattered or lost.
● Properly installed valves, sleeves, plugs, etc. will slide along bores in valve body under their own weight.
● Before assembly, apply a coat of recommended ATF to all parts. Apply petroleum jelly to protect O-rings
and seals, or hold bearings and washers in place during assembly. Do not use grease.
● Extreme care should be taken to avoid damage to O-rings, seals and gaskets when assembling.
● After overhaul, refill the transaxle with new ATF.
● When the A/T drain plug is removed, only some of the fluid is drained. Old A/T fluid will remain in torque
converter and ATF cooling system.
Always follow the procedures under “Changing A/T Fluid” in the AT section when changing A/T fluid. Refer
to AT-13, "Changing A/T Fluid" , AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
Service Notice or Precautions ACS002AJ

OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSIS
● A/T self-diagnosis is performed by the TCM in combination with the ECM. The results can be read through
the blinking pattern of the A/T CHECK indicator or the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). Refer to the table
on AT-87, "Self-Diagnostic Result Test Mode" for the indicator used to display each self-diagnostic result.
● The self-diagnostic results indicated by the MIL are automatically stored in both the ECM and TCM mem-
ories.
Always perform the procedure on AT-38, "HOW TO ERASE DTC" to complete the repair and avoid
unnecessary blinking of the MIL.
For details of OBD-II, refer to EC-50, "ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM" .
● Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use the new style slide-
locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-63, "HAR-
NESS CONNECTOR" .
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis ACS002AK

When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:

● GI-15, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams".
● PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" for power distribution circuit.
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
● GI-11, "How to Follow Trouble Diagnoses".
● GI-27, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident".

Revision; 2004 April AT-10 2003 G35 Coupe

 PREPARATION

PREPARATION PFP:00002
A
Special Service Tools ACS002AL

The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number Description B
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

ST2505S001 Measuring line pressure

AT
(J-34301-C)
Oil pressure gauge set
1 ST25051001
( — ) D
Oil pressure gauge
2 ST25052000
( — )
Hose E
3 ST25053000
( — )
Joint pipe
4 ST25054000 ZZA0600D F
( — )
Adapter
5 ST25055000
( — ) G
Adapter
KV31103600 Measuring line pressure
(J-45674) H
Joint pipe adapter
(With ST25054000)

ZZA1227D

ST33400001 ● Installing rear oil seal J

(J-26082) ● Installing oil pump housing oil seal
Drift
a: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia.
b: 47 mm (1.85 in) dia. K

NT086
L
KV31102400 Installing reverse brake return spring retainer
(J-34285 and J-34285-87)
Clutch spring compressor
a: 320 mm (12.60 in) M
b: 174 mm (6.85 in)

NT423

ST25850000 Remove oil pump assembly

(J-25721-A)
Sliding hammer
a: 179 mm (7.05 in)
b: 70 mm (2.76 in)
c: 40 mm (1.57 in)
d: M12X1.75P
NT422

Revision; 2004 April AT-11 2003 G35 Coupe

 PREPARATION

Commercial Service Tools ACS002AM

Tool name Description

Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts

PBIC0190E

Drift Installing manual shaft oil seal

a: 22mm (0.87 in)

NT083

Revision; 2004 April AT-12 2003 G35 Coupe

 A/T FLUID

A/T FLUID PFP:KLE40

A
Changing A/T Fluid ACS004LA

1. Warm up A/T fluid.

2. Stop engine. B
3. Remove the tightening bolt for A/T fluid level gauge.
4. Drain A/T fluid from drain plug and refill with new A/T fluid. Always refill same volume with drained fluid.
● To replace the A/T fluid, pour in new fluid at the charging pipe with the engine idling and at the same AT
time drain the old fluid from the radiator cooler hose return side.
● When the color of the fluid coming out is about the same as the color of the new fluid, the replacement
is complete. The amount of new transmission fluid to use should be 30 to 50% of the stipulated amount. D
A/T fluid: Genuine Nissan Matic J ATF
Fluid capacity: 10.3 (10-7/8 US qt, 9-1/8 lmp qt) E
CAUTION:
● Use only Genuine Nissan Matic J ATF. Do not mix with other fluid.

● Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine Nissan Matic J ATF will cause deteriora- F
tion in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic trans-
mission, which is not covered by the warranty.
● When filling A/T fluid, take care not to scatter heat generating parts such as exhaust. G

Drain plug:
: 34 N·m (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft-lb) H
5. Run engine at idle speed for 5 minutes.
6. Check fluid level and condition. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" . If fluid is still dirty, repeat step 2.
I
through 5.
7. Install the removed A/T fluid level gauge in the fluid charging pipe.
Level gauge bolt: J
: 5.1 N·m (0.52 kg-m, 45 in-lb)

Checking A/T Fluid ACS004LB K

1. Warm up engine.
2. Check for fluid leakage.
L
3. Remove the tightening bolt for A/T fluid level gauge.
4. Before driving, fluid level can be checked at fluid temperatures of 30 to 50°C (86 to 122°F) using “COLD”
range on A/T fluid level gauge as follows.
M
a. Park vehicle on level surface and set parking brake.
b. Start engine and move selector lever through each gear position. Leave selector lever in “P” position.
c. Check fluid level with engine idling.
d. Remove A/T fluid level gauge and wipe clean with lint-free paper.
CAUTION:
When wiping away the fluid level gauge, always use lint-free paper, not a cloth one.
e. Re-insert A/T fluid level gauge into charging pipe as far as it will go.
CAUTION:
To check fluid level, insert the A/T fluid level gauge until the cap contacts the end of the charging
pipe, with the gauge reversed from the normal attachment conditions.
f. Remove A/T fluid level gauge and note reading. If reading is at low side of range, add fluid to the charging
pipe.
CAUTION:
Do not overfill.
5. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas.

Revision; 2004 April AT-13 2003 G35 Coupe

 A/T FLUID

6. Make the fluid temperature approximately 65°C (149°F).

NOTE:
Fluid level will be greatly affected by temperature as shown in figure. Therefore, be certain to per-
form operation while checking data with CONSULT-II.

SLIA0016E

a. Connect CONSULT-II to data link connector.

b. Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
c. Read out the value of “ATF TEMP 1”.
7. Re-check fluid level at fluid temperatures of approximately 65°C (149°F) using “HOT” range on A/T fluid
level gauge.
CAUTION:
● When wiping away the fluid level gauge, always use lint-free paper, not a cloth one.

● To check fluid level, insert the A/T fluid level gauge until
the cap contacts the end of the charging pipe, with the
gauge reversed from the normal attachment conditions
as shown.
8. Check fluid condition.
● If fluid is very dark or has some burned smell, refer to check
operation of A/T. Flush cooling system after repair of A/T.
● If A/T fluid contains frictional material (clutches, bands, etc.),
replace radiator and flush cooler line using cleaning solvent
and compressed air after repair of A/[Link] to CO-12, "RADI-
ATOR" . SCIA2899E

9. Install the removed A/T fluid level gauge in the fluid charging pipe.
Level gauge bolt:
: 5.1 N·m (0.52 kg-m, 45 in-lb)

Revision; 2004 April AT-14 2003 G35 Coupe

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM PFP:31036

A
Cross-Sectional View ACS002AP

AT

SCIA5262E

1. Front planetary gear 2. Mid planetary gear 3. Rear planetary gear J

4. Direct clutch 5. High and low reverse clutch 6. Reverse brake
7. Drum support 8. Forward brake 9. Low coast brake
10. Input shaft 11. Torque converter 12. Oil pump K
13. Front brake 14. 3rd one-way clutch 15. Input clutch
16. 1st one-way clutch 17. Control valve with TCM 18. Forward one-way clutch
19. Rear extension 20. Output shaft L

Revision; 2004 April AT-15 2003 G35 Coupe

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

Shift Mechanism ACS002AQ

The automatic transmission uses compact dual planetary gear systems to improve power-transmission effi-
ciency, simplify construction and reduce weight.
It also employs an optimum shift control and super wide gear ratios. They improve starting performance and
acceleration during medium and high-speed operation.
CONSTRUCTION

PCIA0002J

1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch

4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake
7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch
10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft
13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier
16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier
19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Output shaft
22. Parking gear 23. Parking pawl

FUNCTION OF CLUTCH AND BRAKE

Name of the Part Abbreviation Function
Front brake (1) Fr/B Fastens the front sun gear (11).
Connects the input shaft (12), the front internal gear (14) and the mid internal
Input clutch (2) I/C
gear (13).
Direct clutch (3) D/C Connects the rear carrier (15) and the rear sun gear (16).
High and low reverse clutch (4) HLR/C Connects the mid sun gear (17) and the rear sun gear (16).
Reverse brake (5) R/B Fastens the rear carrier (15).
Forward brake (6) F/B Fastens the mid sun gear (17).
Low coast brake (7) LC/B Fastens the mid sun gear (17).
Allows the rear sun gear (16) to turn freely forward relative to the mid sun gear
1st one-way clutch (8) 1st/O.C
(17) but fastens it for reverse rotation.
Allows the mid sun gear (17) to turn freely in the forward direction but fastens it
Forward one-way clutch (9) F/O.C
for reverse rotation.
Allows the front sun gear (11) to turn freely in the forward direction but fastens
3rd one-way clutch (10) 3rd/O.C
it for reverse rotation.

Revision; 2004 April AT-16 2003 G35 Coupe

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

CLUTCH AND BAND CHART

A

AT

SCIA4755E

Revision; 2004 April AT-17 2003 G35 Coupe

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

POWER TRANSMISSION
“N” Position
Since both the forward brake and the reverse brake are released, torque from the input shaft drive is not trans-
mitted to the output shaft.
“P” Position
● The same as for the “N” position, both the forward brake and the reverse brake are released, so torque
from the input shaft drive is not transmitted to the output shaft.
● The parking pawl linked with the selector lever meshes with the parking gear and fastens the output shaft
mechanically.

PCIA0003J

1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch

4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake
7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch
10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft
13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier
16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier
19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Output shaft
22. Parking gear 23. Parking pawl

Revision; 2004 April AT-18 2003 G35 Coupe

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

“D1 ” Position
● The forward brake and the forward one-way clutch regulate reverse rotation of the mid sun gear. A
● The first one-way clutch regulates reverse rotation of the rear sun gear.
● The third one-way clutch regulates reverse rotation of the front sun gear.
B
● During deceleration, the mid sun gear turns forward, so the forward one-way clutch idles and the engine
brake is not activated.

AT

SCIA1512E
K
1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch
4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake
7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch L
10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft
13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier
16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier M
19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Output shaft
22. Parking gear 23. Parking pawl

Revision; 2004 April AT-19 2003 G35 Coupe

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

“M1” Position
● The front brake fastens the front sun gear.
● The forward brake and the forward one-way clutch regulate reverse rotation of the mid sun gear.
● High and low reverse clutch connects the rear sun gear and the mid sun gear.
● The low coast brake fastens the mid sun gear.
● During deceleration, the low coast brake regulates forward rotation of the mid sun gear and the engine
brake functions.

SCIA1513E

1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch

4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake
7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch
10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft
13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier
16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier
19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Output shaft
22. Parking gear 23. Parking pawl

Revision; 2004 April AT-20 2003 G35 Coupe

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

“D2 ” Position
● The forward brake and the forward one-way clutch regulate reverse rotation of the mid sun gear. A
● The third one-way clutch regulates reverse rotation of the front sun gear.
● The direct clutch is coupled, and the rear carrier and rear sun gear are connected.
B
● During deceleration, the mid sun gear turns forward, so the forward one-way clutch idles and engine
brake is not activated.

AT

SCIA1514E
K
1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch
4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake
7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch L
10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft
13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier
16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier M
19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Output shaft
22. Parking gear 23. Parking pawl

Revision; 2004 April AT-21 2003 G35 Coupe

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

“M2” Position
● The front brake fastens the front sun gear.
● The forward brake and the forward one-way clutch regulate reverse rotation of the mid sun gear.
● The direct clutch is coupled, and the rear carrier and rear sun gear are connected.
● The low coast brake fastens the mid sun gear.
● During deceleration, the low coast brake regulates forward rotation of the mid sun gear and the engine
brake functions.

SCIA1515E

1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch

4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake
7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch
10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft
13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier
16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier
19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Output shaft
22. Parking gear 23. Parking pawl

Revision; 2004 April AT-22 2003 G35 Coupe

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

“D3 ” and “M3” Position

● The front brake fastens the front sun gear. A
● The direct clutch is coupled, and the rear carrier and rear sun gear are connected.
● The high and low reverse clutch is coupled, and the mid sun gear and rear sun gear are connected.
B

AT

J
SCIA1516E

1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch

4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake K
7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch
10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft
13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier L
16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier
19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Output shaft
22. Parking gear 23. Parking pawl M

Revision; 2004 April AT-23 2003 G35 Coupe

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

“D4 ” and “M4” Position

● The direct clutch is coupled, and the rear carrier and rear sun gear are connected.
● The high and low reverse clutch is coupled, and the mid sun gear and rear sun gear are connected.
● The input clutch is coupled, and the front internal gear and mid internal gear are connected.
● The drive power is conveyed to the front internal gear, mid internal gear, and rear carrier and the three
planetary gears rotate forward as one unit.

SCIA1517E

1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch

4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake
7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch
10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft
13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier
16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier
19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Output shaft
22. Parking gear 23. Parking pawl

Revision; 2004 April AT-24 2003 G35 Coupe

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

“D5 ” and “M5” Position

● The front brake fastens the front sun gear. A
● The input clutch is coupled, and the front internal gear and mid internal gear are connected.
● The high and low reverse clutch is coupled, and the mid sun gear and rear sun gear are connected.
B

AT

J
SCIA1518E

1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch

4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake K
7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch
10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft
13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier L
16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier
19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Output shaft
22. Parking gear 23. Parking pawl M

Revision; 2004 April AT-25 2003 G35 Coupe

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

“R” Position
● The front brake fastens the front sun gear.
● The high and low reverse clutch is coupled, and the mid sun gear and rear sun gear are connected.
● The reverse brake fastens the rear carrier.

SCIA1519E

1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch

4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake
7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch
10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft
13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier
16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier
19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Output shaft
22. Parking gear 23. Parking pawl

Revision; 2004 April AT-26 2003 G35 Coupe

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

TCM Function ACS002AR

A
The function of the TCM is to:
● Receive input signals sent from various switches and sensors.
● Determine required line pressure, shifting point, lock-up operation, and engine brake operation. B
● Send required output signals to the respective solenoids.
CONTROL SYSTEM OUTLINE
The automatic transmission senses vehicle operating conditions through various sensors or signals. It always AT
controls the optimum shift position and reduces shifting and lock-up shocks.
SENSORS TCM ACTUATORS
D
PNP switch
Input clutch solenoid valve
Throttle position sensor
Shift control Direct clutch solenoid valve
Accelerator pedal position sensor
Line pressure control Front brake solenoid valve
Closed throttle position signal
Lock-up control High and low reverse clutch
E
Wide-open throttle position signal
Engine brake control solenoid valve
Engine speed signal Þ Þ
Timing control Low coast brake solenoid valve
A/T fluid temperature sensor
Fail-safe control Torque converter clutch solenoid
Revolution sensor F
Self-diagnosis valve
Vehicle speed sensor
CONSULT-II communication line Line pressure solenoid valve
Manual mode switch
Duet-EA control A/T CHECK indicator lamp
Stop lamp switch signal
CAN system Starter relay G
Turbine revolution sensor
Back-up lamp relay
ATF pressure SW

CONTROL SYSTEM DIAGRAM

H

SCIA5325E

Revision; 2004 April AT-27 2003 G35 Coupe

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

CAN Communication ACS002AS

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many elec-
tronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
CAN COMMUNICATION UNIT
System diagram

SKIA1880E

Input/output signal chart

T: Transmit R: Receive
Steering VDC/TCS/
Combina-
Signals ECM TCM BCM angle ABS con- IPDM E/R
tion meter
sensor trol unit
Engine speed signal T R R R
Engine coolant temperature signal T R R
Accelerator pedal position signal T R R
Closed throttle position signal T R
Wide open throttle position signal T R
Battery voltage signal T R
Stop lamp switch signal R T
Fuel consumption monitor signal T R
A/T self-diagnosis signal R T
A/T CHECK indicator lamp signal T R
A/T position indicator signal T R R
ABS operation signal R T
A/T shift schedule change demand
R T
signal
Air conditioner switch signal R T
A/C compressor request signal T R
A/C compressor feedback signal T R
Blower fan motor switch signal R T
Cooling fan motor operation signal R T
Position lights request signal R T R
Low beam request signal T R
Low beam status signal R T
High beam request signal R T R
High beam status signal R T

Revision; 2004 April AT-28 2003 G35 Coupe

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

Steering VDC/TCS/
Combina-
Signals ECM TCM BCM angle ABS con- IPDM E/R A
tion meter
sensor trol unit
Front fog lights request signal T R
R T B
Vehicle speed signal
R R T R
Sleep request 1 signal R T
AT
Sleep request 2 signal T R
Wake up request 1 signal R T R
Wake up request 2 signal R T R D
Door switch signal (without naviga-
R T R
tion system)
Door switch signal (with navigation E
T R
system)
Turn indicator signal R T
Seat belt buckle switch signal T R F
Oil pressure switch signal R T
Buzzer output signal R T
G
Trunk switch signal R T
ASCD main switch signal T R
ASCD cruise signal T R H
Output shaft revolution signal R T
Front wiper request signal T R
I
Front wiper stop position signal R T
Rear window defogger switch signal T R
Rear window defogger control sig- J
R T
nal
Manual mode signal R T
Not manual mode signal R T K
Manual mode shift up signal R T
Manual mode shift down signal R T
L
Manual mode indicator signal T R
Hood switch signal R T
Theft warning horn request signal T R M
Horn chirp signal R T
Steering angle sensor signal T R

Revision; 2004 April AT-29 2003 G35 Coupe

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

Input/Output Signal of TCM ACS002AT

Line Vehicle Engine Fail-safe Self-diag-

Shift Lock-up
Control item pressure speed brake function nostics
control control
control control control (*3) function

Accelerator pedal position signal (*5) X X X X X X X

Vehicle speed sensor A/T
X X X X X X
(revolution sensor)

Vehicle speed sensor MTR(*1) (*5) X X X X X

Closed throttle position signal(*5) (*2) X (*2) X (*2) X (*4) X

Wide-open throttle position sig-
(*2) X (*2) X (*4) X
nal(*5)
Turbine revolution sensor 1 X X X X
Turbine revolution sensor 2
Input X X X X
(for 4th speed only)

Engine speed signals(*5) X X

PNP switch X X X X X X (*4) X

Stop lamp switch signal(*5) X X (*4) X

A/T fluid temperature sensors 1, 2 X X X X X X

Cruise signal(*5) X X X X
ASCD Overdrive
X X X
release signal(*5)
TCM power supply voltage signal X X X X X X X
Direct clutch solenoid
X X X X
(ATF pressure switch 5)
Input clutch solenoid
X X X X
(ATF pressure switch 3)
High and low reverse clutch sole-
X X X X
noid (ATF pressure switch 6)
Out- Front brake solenoid
put X X X X
(ATF pressure switch 1)
Low coast brake solenoid
X X X X X
(ATF pressure switch 2)
Line pressure solenoid X X X X X X X
TCC solenoid X X X

Self-diagnostics table(*6) X
*1: Spare for vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor)
*2: Spare for accelerator pedal position signal
*3: If these input and output signals are different, the TCM triggers the fail-safe function.
*4: Used as a condition for starting self-diagnostics; if self-diagnostics are not started, it is judged that there is some kind of error.
*5: Input by CAN communications.
*6: Output by CAN communications.

Revision; 2004 April AT-30 2003 G35 Coupe

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

Line Pressure Control ACS002AU

A
● When an input torque signal equivalent to the engine drive force is sent from the ECM to the TCM, the
TCM controls the line pressure solenoid.
● This line pressure solenoid controls the pressure regulator valve as the signal pressure and adjusts the
pressure of the operating oil discharged from the oil pump to the line pressure most appropriate to the B
driving state.

AT

PCIA0007E
F
LINE PRESSURE CONTROL IS BASED ON THE TCM LINE PRESSURE CHARACTERISTIC
PATTERN
● The TCM has stored in memory a number of patterns for the optimum line pressure characteristic for the
G
driving state.
● In order to obtain the most appropriate line pressure characteristic to meet the current driving state, the
TCM controls the line pressure solenoid current valve and thus controls the line pressure.
H
Normal Control
Each clutch is adjusted to the necessary pressure to match the
engine drive force. I

PCIA0008E

L
Back-up Control (Engine brake)
When the select operation is executed during driving and the trans-
mission is shifted down, the line pressure is set according to the
vehicle speed. M

PCIA0009E

Revision; 2004 April AT-31 2003 G35 Coupe

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

During Shift Change

The necessary and adequate line pressure for shift change is set.
For this reason, line pressure pattern setting corresponds to input
torque and gearshift selection. Also, line pressure characteristic is
according to engine speed, during engine brake operation.

PCIA0010E

At Low Fluid Temperature

When the A/T fluid temperature drops below the prescribed tempera-
ture, in order to speed up the action of each friction element, the line
pressure is set higher than the normal line pressure characteristic.

PCIA0011E

Shift Control ACS002AV

The clutch pressure control solenoid is controlled by the signals from the switches and sensors. Thus, the
clutch pressure is adjusted to be appropriate to the engine load state and vehicle driving state. It becomes
possible to finely control the clutch hydraulic pressure with high precision and a smoother shift change charac-
teristic is attained.

PCIA0012E

SHIFT CHANGE
The clutch is controlled with the optimum timing and oil pressure by the engine speed, engine torque informa-
tion, etc.

Revision; 2004 April AT-32 2003 G35 Coupe

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

Shift Change System Diagram

A

AT

PCIA0013E

G
*1: Full phase real-time feedback control monitors movement of gear ratio at gear change, and controls oil
pressure at real-time to achieve the best gear ratio.
Lock-Up Control ACS002AW H
The torque converter clutch piston in the torque converter is engaged to eliminate torque converter slip to
increase power transmission efficiency.
The torque converter clutch control valve operation is controlled by the torque converter clutch solenoid valve, I
which is controlled by a signal from TCM, and the torque converter clutch control valve engages or releases
the torque converter clutch piston.
Lock-up Operation Condition Table J
Selector lever D position, M5 position M4 position
Gear position 5 4 4
K
Lock-up × – ×
Slip lock-up × × –
L
TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH CONTROL VALVE CONTROL
Lock-Up Control System Diagram
M

PCIA0014E

Lock-Up Released
● In the lock-up released state, the torque converter clutch control valve is set into the unlocked state by the
torque converter clutch solenoid and the lock-up apply pressure is drained.
In this way, the torque converter clutch piston is not coupled.

Revision; 2004 April AT-33 2003 G35 Coupe

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

Lock-Up Applied
● In the lock-up applied state, the torque converter clutch control valve is set into the locked state by the
torque converter clutch solenoid and lock-up apply pressure is generated.
In this way, the torque converter clutch piston is pressed and coupled.
SMOOTH LOCK-UP CONTROL
When shifting from the lock-up released state to the lock-up applied state, the current output to the torque con-
verter clutch solenoid is controlled with the TCM. In this way, when shifting to the lock-up applied state, the
torque converter clutch is temporarily set to the half-clutched state to reduce the shock.
Half-Clutched State
● The current output from the TCM to the torque converter clutch solenoid is varied to steadily increase the
torque converter clutch solenoid pressure.
In this way, the lock-up apply pressure gradually rises and while the torque converter clutch piston is put
into half-clutched status, the torque converter clutch piston operating pressure is increased and the cou-
pling is completed smoothly.
Slip Lock-Up Control
● In the slip region, the torque converter clutch solenoid current is controlled with the TCM to put it into the
half-clutched state. This absorbs the engine torque fluctuation and lock-up operates from low speed.
This raises the fuel efficiency for 4th and 5th gear at both low speed and when the accelerator has a low
degree of opening.

Revision; 2004 April AT-34 2003 G35 Coupe

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

Engine Brake Control ACS002AX

A
● The forward one-way clutch transmits the drive force from the engine to the rear wheels. But the reverse
drive from the rear wheels is not transmitted to the engine because the one-way clutch is idling.
Therefore, the low coast brake solenoid is operated to prevent the forward one-way clutch from idling and
the engine brake is operated in the same manner as conventionally. B

AT

PCIA0015E H
● The operation of the low coast brake solenoid switches the low coast brake switching valve and controls
the coupling and releasing of the low coast brake.
The low coast brake reducing valve controls the low coast brake coupling force. I
Control Valve ACS002AY

FUNCTION OF CONTROL VALVE

Name Function
J

In order to prevent the pressure supplied to the torque converter from being excessive,
Torque converter regulator valve the line pressure is adjusted to the optimum pressure (torque converter operating pres-
sure). K
Pressure regulator valve
Adjusts the oil discharged from the oil pump to the optimum pressure (line pressure) for
Pressure regulator plug
the driving state.
Pressure regulator sleeve L
When the front brake is coupled, adjusts the line pressure to the optimum pressure
Front brake control valve (front brake pressure) and supplies it to the front brake. (In 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 5th gears,
adjusts the clutch pressure.)
M
Adjusts the pressure (accumulator control pressure) acting on the accumulator piston
Accumulator control valve
and low coast reducing valve to the pressure appropriate to the driving state.
Adjusts the line pressure and produces the constant pressure (pilot pressure) required
Pilot valve A
for line pressure control, shift change control, and lock-up control.
Adjusts the line pressure and produces the constant pressure (pilot pressure) required
Pilot valve B
for shift change control.
Low coast brake switching valve During engine braking, supplies the line pressure to the low coast brake reducing valve.
When the low coast brake is coupled, adjusts the line pressure to the optimum pressure
Low coast brake reducing valve
(low coast brake pressure) and supplies it to the low coast brake.
N-R accumulator Produces the stabilizing pressure for when N-R is selected.
Direct clutch piston switching valve Operates in 4th gear and switches the direct clutch coupling capacity.
When the high and low reverse clutch is coupled, adjusts the line pressure to the opti-
High and low reverse clutch control valve mum pressure (high and low reverse clutch pressure) and supplies it to the high and low
reverse clutch. (In 1st, 3rd, 4th and 5th gears, adjusts the clutch pressure.)

Revision; 2004 April AT-35 2003 G35 Coupe

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM

Name Function
When the input clutch is coupled, adjusts the line pressure to the optimum pressure
Input clutch control valve (input clutch pressure) and supplies it to the input clutch. (In 4th and 5th gears, adjusts
the clutch pressure.)
When the direct clutch is coupled, adjusts the line pressure to the optimum pressure
Direct clutch control valve (direct clutch pressure) and supplies it to the direct clutch. (In 2nd, 3rd, and 4th gears,
adjusts the clutch pressure.)
TCC control valve
Switches the lock-up to operating or released. Also, by executing the lock-up operation
TCC control plug
transiently, lock-up smoothly.
TCC control sleeve
Operates during lock-up to switch the torque converter, cooling, and lubrication system
Torque converter lubrication valve
oil path.
Cool bypass valve Allows excess oil to bypass cooler circuit without being fed into it.
Line pressure relief valve Discharges excess oil from line pressure circuit.
N-D accumulator Produces the stabilizing pressure for when N-D is selected.
Sends line pressure to each circuit according to the select position. The circuits to which
Manual valve
the line pressure is not sent drain.

FUNCTION OF PRESSURE SWITCH

Name Function
Detects any malfunction in the front brake hydraulic pressure. When it detects any mal-
Pressure switch 1 (FR/B)
function, it puts the system into fail-safe mode.
Detects any malfunction in the low coast brake hydraulic pressure. When it detects any
Pressure switch 2 (LC/B)
malfunction, it puts the system into fail-safe mode.
Detects any malfunction in the input clutch hydraulic pressure. When it detects any mal-
Pressure switch 3 (I/C)
function, it puts the system into fail-safe mode.
Detects any malfunction in the direct clutch hydraulic pressure. When it detects any mal-
Pressure switch 5 (D/C)
function, it puts the system into fail-safe mode.
Detects any malfunction in the high and low reverse clutch hydraulic pressure. When it
Pressure switch 6 (HLR/C)
detects any malfunction, it puts the system into fail-safe mode.

Revision; 2004 April AT-36 2003 G35 Coupe

 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM PFP:00028

A
Introduction ACS002AZ

The A/T system has two self-diagnostic systems.

The first is the emission-related on board diagnostic system (OBD-II) performed by the TCM in combination B
with the ECM. The malfunction is indicated by the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) and is stored as a DTC in
the ECM memory but not the TCM memory.
The second is the TCM original self-diagnosis indicated by the A/T CHECK indicator lamp. The malfunction is
stored in the TCM memory. The detected items are overlapped with OBD-II self-diagnostic items. For detail, AT
refer to AT-87, "Self-Diagnostic Result Test Mode" .
OBD-II Function for A/T System ACS002B0
D
The ECM provides emission-related on board diagnostic (OBD-II) functions for the A/T system. One function
is to receive a signal from the TCM used with OBD-related parts of the A/T system. The signal is sent to the
ECM when a malfunction occurs in the corresponding OBD-related part. The other function is to indicate a E
diagnostic result by means of the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) on the instrument panel. Sensors, switches
and solenoid valves are used as sensing elements.
The MIL automatically illuminates in One or Two Trip Detection Logic when a malfunction is sensed in relation
to A/T system parts. F

One or Two Trip Detection Logic of OBD-II ACS002B1

ONE TRIP DETECTION LOGIC

G
If a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, the MIL will illuminate and the malfunction will be stored in
the ECM memory as a DTC. The TCM is not provided with such a memory function.
TWO TRIP DETECTION LOGIC H
When a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, it is stored in the ECM memory as a 1st trip DTC
(diagnostic trouble code) or 1st trip freeze frame data. At this point, the MIL will not illuminate. — First Trip
If the same malfunction as that experienced during the first test drive is sensed during the second test drive, I
the MIL will illuminate. — Second Trip
The “trip” in the “One or Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed
during vehicle operation.
J
OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) ACS002B2

HOW TO READ DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC

DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods. K
( with CONSULT-II or GST) CONSULT-II or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0705, P0720 etc.
These DTC are prescribed by SAE J2012.
(CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.)
L
● 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
● Output of the diagnostic trouble code indicates that the indicated circuit has a malfunction. How-
ever, in case of the Mode II and GST, they do not indicate whether the malfunction is still occurring
M
or occurred in the past and returned to normal.
CONSULT-II can identify them as shown below, therefore, CONSULT-II (if available) is recom-
mended.
A sample of CONSULT-II display for DTC and 1st trip DTC is shown
on the next page. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunction is displayed
in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS mode for “ENGINE” with CON-
SULT-II. Time data indicates how many times the vehicle was driven
after the last detection of a DTC.

SAT014K

Revision; 2004 April AT-37 2003 G35 Coupe

 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be “0”.

SAT015K

If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be “1t”.

SAT016K

Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data

The ECM has a memory function, which stores the driving condition such as fuel system status, calculated
load value, engine coolant temperature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed and vehicle
speed at the moment the ECM detects a malfunction.
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data,
and the data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II
or GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, not on the GST. For
detail, refer to EC-107, "CONSULT-II Function" .
Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data of freeze frame data) can be stored in the
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority
for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once
freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no
longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the fol-
lowing priorities to update the data.
Priority Items
1 Freeze frame data Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0306
Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175
2 Except the above items (Includes A/T related items)
3 1st trip freeze frame data

Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTC) are cleared when the ECM mem-
ory is erased.
HOW TO ERASE DTC
The diagnostic trouble code can be erased by CONSULT-II, GST or ECM DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE as
described following.
● If the battery cable is disconnected, the diagnostic trouble code will be lost within 24 hours.
● When you erase the DTC, using CONSULT-II or GST is easier and quicker than switching the mode
selector on the ECM.
The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared from the ECM memory when erasing DTC
related to OBD-II. For details, refer to EC-51, "Emission-Related Diagnostic Information" .
● Diagnostic trouble codes (DTC)
● 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes (1st trip DTC)
● Freeze frame data
Revision; 2004 April AT-38 2003 G35 Coupe
 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

● 1st trip freeze frame data

● System readiness test (SRT) codes A
● Test values
HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH CONSULT-II) B
● If a DTC is displayed for both ECM and TCM, it is necessary to be erased for both ECM and TCM.
1. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least
10 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again. AT
2. Turn CONSULT-II “ON” and touch “A/T”.
3. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
4. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the TCM will be erased.) Then touch “BACK” twice. D
5. Touch “ENGINE”.
6. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
E
7. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.)

SCIA5671E

HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH GST)

1. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least
10 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again.
2. Perform “TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools)”. Refer to AT-96, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOS-
TIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" . (The engine warm-up step can be skipped when performing the diag-
nosis only to erase the DTC.)
3. Select Mode 4 with Generic Scan Tool (GST). For details, refer to EC-119, "Generic Scan Tool (GST)
Function" .

Revision; 2004 April AT-39 2003 G35 Coupe

 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

HOW TO ERASE DTC (NO TOOLS)

The A/T CHECK indicator lamp is located on the instrument panel.
1. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least
10 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again.
2. Perform “TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools)”. Refer to AT-96, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOS-
TIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" . (The engine warm-up step can be skipped when performing the diag-
nosis only to erase the DTC.)
3. Perform “OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No tools)”. Refer to EC-64, "How to Erase DTC" .
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ACS002B3

DESCRIPTION
The MIL is located on the instrument panel.
1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned “ON” with-
out the engine running. This is a bulb check.
● If the MIL does not light up, refer to DI-32, "WARNING LAMPS" ,
or see EC-628, "MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR" .
2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off.
If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has
detected an engine system malfunction.

SEF217U

Revision; 2004 April AT-40 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PFP:00004

A
DTC Inspection Priority Chart ACS002B4

If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority
chart. B
NOTE:
If DTC U1000 is displayed with other DTCs, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to
AT-98 . AT
Priority Detected items (DTC)
1 U1000 CAN communication line
2 Except above D

Fail-Safe ACS002B5

The TCM has an electrical fail-safe mode. This mode makes it possible to operate even if there is a malfunc- E
tion in a main electronic control input/output signal circuit.
In fail safe mode, even if the selector lever is “D” or “M” mode, the transmission is fixed in 2nd or 4th (depend-
ing on the breakdown position), so the customer should feel “slipping” or “poor acceleration”. When fail-safe F
mode is triggered, when the ignition switch is switched “ON”, the A/T CHECK indicator lamp flashes for about
8 seconds. (Refer to AT-96, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" ).
Even when the electronic circuits are normal, under special conditions (for example, when slamming on the
brake with the wheels spinning drastically and stopping the tire rotation), the transmission can go into fail-safe G
mode. If this happens, switch “OFF” the ignition switch for 10 seconds, then switch it “ON” again to return to
the normal shift pattern. Also, the A/T CHECK indicator lamp flashes for about 8 seconds once, then is
cleared. Therefore, the customer's vehicle has returned to normal, so handle according to the “diagnostics H
flow” (Refer to AT-44 ).
FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION
If any malfunction occurs in a sensor or solenoid, this function controls the A/T to make driving possible. I

Vehicle Speed Sensor

● Signals are input from two systems - from vehicle speed sensor A/T (revolution sensor) installed on the J
transmission and from combination meter so normal driving is possible even if there is a malfunction in
one of the systems. And if vehicle speed sensor A/T (revolution sensor) has unusual cases, 5th gear and
manual mode are prohibited.
K
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor
● If there is a malfunction in one of the systems, the accelerator opening angle is controlled by ECM accord-
ing to a pre-determined accelerator angle to make driving possible. And if there are malfunctions in tow L
systems, the engine speed is fixed by ECM to a pre-determined engine speed to make driving possible.
Throttle Position Sensor
● If there is a malfunction in one of the systems, the accelerator opening angle is controlled by ECM accord- M
ing to a pre-determined accelerator angle to make driving possible. And if there are malfunctions in tow
systems, the accelerator opening angle is controlled by the idle signal sent from the ECM which is based
on input indicating either idle condition or off-idle condition (pre-determined accelerator opening) in order
to make driving possible.
PNP Switch
● In the unlikely event that a malfunction signal enters the TCM, the position indicator is switched “OFF”, the
starter relay is switched “OFF” (starter starting is disabled), and the position is fixed to the “D” range to
make driving possible.
Starter Relay
● The starter relay is switched “OFF”. (Starter starting is disabled.)

Revision; 2004 April AT-41 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

A/T Interlock
● If there is an A/T interlock judgment malfunction, the transmission is fixed in 2nd gear to make driving pos-
sible.
NOTE:
When the vehicle is driven fixed in 2nd gear, a turbine revolution sensor malfunction is displayed,
but this is not a turbine revolution sensor malfunction.
● When the coupling pattern below is detected, the fail-safe action corresponding to the pattern is per-
formed.
A/T INTERLOCK COUPLING PATTERN TABLE
●: NG X: OK
Clutch pressure output pattern after fail-safe func-
ATF pressure switch output
tion
Fail-safe
Gear position SW6
SW3 SW5 SW1 SW2 function
(HLR/ I/C HLR/C D/C FR/B LC/B L/U
(I/C) (D/C) (FR/B) (LC/B)
C)
Held in
3rd – X X – ● OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
2nd gear
A/T inter-
Held in
lock cou- 4th – X X – ● OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
2nd gear
pling pattern
Held in
5th X X – X ● OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
2nd gear

A/T 1st Engine Braking

● When there is an A/T first gear engine brake judgment malfunction, the low coast brake solenoid is
switched “OFF” to avoid the engine brake operation.
Line Pressure Solenoid
● The solenoid is switched “OFF” and the line pressure is set to the maximum hydraulic pressure to make
driving possible.
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid
● The solenoid is switched “OFF” to release the lock-up.
Low Coast Brake Solenoid
● When a (electrical or functional) malfunction occurs, in order to make driving possible, if the solenoid is
“ON”, the transmission is held in 2nd gear; if the solenoid is “OFF”, the transmission is held in 4th gear.
(engine brake is not applied in 1st and 2nd gear.)
Input Clutch Solenoid
● If a (electrical or functional) malfunction occurs with the solenoid either “ON” or “OFF”, the transmission is
held in 4th gear to make driving possible.
Direct Clutch Solenoid
● If a (electrical or functional) malfunction occurs with the solenoid either “ON” or “OFF”, the transmission is
held in 4th gear to make driving possible.
Front Brake Solenoid
● If a (electrical or functional) malfunction occurs with the solenoid “ON”, in order to make driving possible,
the A/T is held in 5th gear; if the solenoid is OFF, 4th gear.
High and Low Reverse Clutch Solenoid
● If a (electrical or functional) malfunction occurs with the solenoid either “ON” or “OFF”, the transmission is
held in 4th gear to make driving possible.
Turbine Revolution Sensor 1 or 2
● The control is the same as if there were no turbine revolution sensors, 5th gear and manual mode are pro-
hibited.

Revision; 2004 April AT-42 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

How To Perform Trouble Diagnosis For Quick and Accurate Repair ACS002B6

INTRODUCTION A
The TCM receives a signal from the vehicle speed sensor, accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position
sensor) or PNP switch and provides shift control or lock-up control via A/T solenoid valves.
The TCM also communicates with the ECM by means of a signal B
sent from sensing elements used with the OBD-related parts of the
A/T system for malfunction-diagnostic purposes. The TCM is capa-
ble of diagnosing malfunctioning parts while the ECM can store mal-
AT
functions in its memory.
Input and output signals must always be correct and stable in the
operation of the A/T system. The A/T system must be in good oper-
ating condition and be free of valve seizure, solenoid valve malfunc- D
tion, etc.

SAT631IB E

It is much more difficult to diagnose an error that occurs intermit-

tently rather than continuously. Most intermittent errors are caused F
by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case, careful
checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the replacement of
good parts.
G
A visual check only may not find the cause of the errors. A road test
with CONSULT-II (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should be
performed. Follow the AT-44, "WORK FLOW" .
H

SAT632I

I
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a
customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The cus-
tomer can supply good information about such errors, especially J
intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under
what conditions they occur. A “Diagnostic Worksheet” as shown on
the example (Refer to AT-45 ) should be used.
K
Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” errors first. This will
help troubleshoot driveability errors on an electronically controlled
engine vehicle.
Also check related Service bulletins. L
SEF234G

Revision; 2004 April AT-43 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

WORK FLOW
A good understanding of the malfunction conditions can make troubleshooting faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about a malfunction. It is important to fully understand the symp-
toms or conditions for a customer complaint.
Make good use of the two sheets provided, “Information From Customer” (Refer to AT-45 ) and “Diagnostic
Worksheet” (Refer to AT-45 ), to perform the best troubleshooting possible.
Work Flow Chart

SCIA0501E

*1. AT-45 *2. AT-45 *3. AT-41

*4. AT-50 *5. AT-50, AT-51 *6. AT-53
*7. AT-86 *8. AT-37 *9. AT-96
*10. AT-98 *11. AT-237 *12. AT-239
*13. AT-281 *14. AT-60 *15. AT-38
*16. AT-98 *17. AT-233 *18. EC-51

Revision; 2004 April AT-44 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET
Information From Customer A
KEY POINTS
● WHAT..... Vehicle and A/T model
B
● WHEN..... Date, Frequencies
● WHERE..... Road conditions
● HOW..... Operating conditions, Symptoms AT
Customer name MR/MS Model & Year VIN
Trans. Model Engine Mileage
D
Incident Date Manuf. Date In Service Date
Frequency ❏ Continuous ❏ Intermittent ( times a day)
Symptoms ❏ Vehicle does not move. (❏ Any position ❏ Particular position) E
❏ No up-shift (❏ 1st → 2nd ❏ 2nd → 3rd ❏ 3rd → 4th ❏ 4th → 5th)
❏ No down-shift (❏ 5th → 4th ❏ 4th → 3rd ❏ 3rd → 2nd ❏ 2nd → 1st)
❏ Lock-up malfunction F
❏ Shift point too high or too low.
❏ Shift shock or slip (❏ N → D ❏ Lock-up ❏ Any drive position)
G
❏ Noise or vibration
❏ No kick down
❏ No pattern select H
❏ Others
( )
A/T CHECK indicator lamp Blinks for about 8 seconds. I
❏ Continuously lit ❏ Not lit
Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) ❏ Continuously lit ❏ Not lit J
Diagnostic Worksheet Chart
1 ❏ Read the item on “cautions concerning fail-safe and understand the customer's complaint. AT-41
K
❏ A/T fluid inspection

2 ❏ Leak (Repair leak location.) AT-50

❏ State
❏ Amount
L

❏ Stall test and line pressure test

❏ Stall test
M
❏ 1st one-way clutch
❏ Torque converter one-way clutch
❏ 3rd one-way clutch
❏ Front brake AT-50, AT-
❏ Engine
3 ❏ High and low reverse clutch 51
❏ Line pressure low
❏ Low coast brake
❏ Except for input clutch and direct
❏ Forward brake
clutch, clutches and brakes OK
❏ Forward one-way clutch

❏ Line pressure inspection - Suspected part:

Revision; 2004 April AT-45 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

❏ Execute all road tests and enter checks in required inspection items. AT-53
Check before engine is started
❏ The A/T CHECK Indicator Lamp does come on. AT-241 . AT-54
❏ Execute self-diagnostics Enter checks for detected items.
❏ Vehicle speed sensor·A/T. AT-110 .
❏ Vehicle speed sensor·MTR. AT-157 .
❏ Direct clutch solenoid valve. AT-189 .
❏ TCC solenoid valve. AT-117 .
❏ Line pressure solenoid [Link]-127 .
❏ Input clutch solenoid valve. AT-170 .
❏ Front brake solenoid valve. AT-179 .
❏ Low coast brake solenoid valve. AT-208 .
4-1. ❏ High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve. AT-198 .
❏ PNP switch. AT-105 .
❏ A/T fluid temperature sensors 1, 2. AT-146 .
❏ Turbine revolution sensors 1, 2. AT-152 .
❏ A/T interlock. AT-159 .
❏ A/T 1st engine braking. AT-166 .
❏ Start signal. AT-101 .
❏ Accelerator pedal position signal. AT-144 .
❏ Engine speed signal. AT-115 .
❏ CAN communication. AT-98 .
4
❏ TCM power supply. AT-132 .
❏ Battery
❏ Other
Idle inspection
❏ Engine Cannot Be Started in “P” and “N” Position. AT-243 .
❏ In “ P” Position, Vehicle Moves When Pushed. AT-243 .
4-2. ❏ In “N” Position Vehicle Moves. AT-245 . AT-54
❏ Large Shock “N” to “D” Position. AT-246 .
❏ Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position. AT-249 .
❏ Vehicle does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position. AT-251 .
Driving tests
Part 1
❏ Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1. AT-255 .
❏ A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2. AT-257 .
4-3. ❏ A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3. AT-259 .
AT-55
❏ A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4. AT-262 .
❏ A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D5. AT-264 .
❏ A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up. AT-266
❏ A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition. AT-269 .
❏ Lock-up Is Not Released. AT-270 .
❏ Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle. AT-271 .

Revision; 2004 April AT-46 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Part 2
A
❏ Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1. AT-255 .
❏ A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2. AT-257 . AT-57
❏ A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3. AT-259 .
❏ A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4. AT-262 . B
Part 3
❏ Cannot Be Changed Manual Mode. AT-272
❏ A/T Does Not Shift: 5th gear→ 4th gear. AT-273 . AT
❏ A/T Does Not Shift: 4th gear → 3rd gear. AT-275 . AT-58
❏ A/T Does Not Shift: 3rd gear → 2nd gear. AT-277 .
❏ A/T Does Not Shift: 2nd gear →1st gear. AT-279 .
❏ Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake. AT-281 . D
❏ Execute self-diagnostics Enter checks for detected items.
❏ Vehicle speed sensor·A/T. AT-110 .
❏ Vehicle speed sensor·MTR. AT-157 . E
❏ Direct clutch solenoid [Link]-189 .
4 4-3
❏ TCC solenoid valve. AT-117 .
❏ Line pressure solenoid [Link]-127 .
❏ Input clutch solenoid valve. AT-170 . F
❏ Front brake solenoid valve. AT-179 .
❏ Low coast brake solenoid valve. AT-208 .
❏ High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve. AT-198
❏ PNP switch. AT-105 . G
❏ A/T fluid temperature sensors 1, 2. AT-146 .
❏ Turbine revolution sensors 1, 2. AT-152 .
❏ A/T interlock. AT-159 .
H
❏ A/T 1st engine braking. AT-166 .
❏ Start [Link]-101 .
❏ Accelerator pedal position signal. AT-144 .
❏ Engine sped signal. AT-115 . I
❏ CAN communication. AT-98 .
❏ TCM power supply. AT-132 .
❏ Battery
❏ Other J
❏ Inspect each system for items found to be NG in the self-diagnostics and repair or replace the malfunction
5
parts.
6 ❏ Execute all road tests and enter the checks again for the required items. AT-53 K
❏ For any remaining NG items, execute the “diagnostics procedure” and repair or replace the malfunction parts.
7 See the chart for diagnostics by symptoms. (This chart also contains other symptoms and inspection proce- AT-60
dures.) L
AT-86, AT-
8 ❏ Erase the results of the self-diagnostics from the TCM.
96
M

Revision; 2004 April AT-47 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

A/T Electrical Parts Location ACS002B7

SCIA1999E

Revision; 2004 April AT-48 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Circuit Diagram ACS002B8

AT

TCWT0098E

Revision; 2004 April AT-49 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis ACS002B9

A/T FLUID CHECK

Fluid Leakage and Fluid Level Check
● Inspect for fluid leakage and check the fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
Fluid Condition Check
Inspect the fluid condition.
Fluid status Conceivable Cause Required Operation
Replace the A/T fluid and check the
Varnished (viscous Clutch, brake A/T main unit and the vehicle for
varnish state) scorched malfunctions (wire harnesses,
cooler pipes, etc.)
Milky white or Replace the A/T fluid and check for
Water in the fluid
cloudy places where water is getting in.
Large amount of Unusual wear of
Replace the A/T fluid and check for
metal powder mixed sliding parts within
improper operation of the A/T.
in A/T SAT638A

STALL TEST
Stall Test Procedure
1. Inspect the amount of engine oil. Replenish the engine oil if necessary.
2. Drive for about 10 minutes to warm up the vehicle so that the A/
T fluid temperature is 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F). Inspect the
amount of A/T fluid. Replenish if necessary.

SAT647B

3. Securely engage the parking brake so that the tires do not turn.

SCIA1224E

4. Engine start, apply foot brake, and place selector lever in “D”
position.
5. While holding down the foot brake, gradually press down the
accelerator pedal.
6. Quickly read off the stall speed, then quickly remove your foot
from the accelerator pedal.
CAUTION:
Do not hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 sec-
onds during this test.
7. Move the selector lever to the “N” position. SAT514G
8. Cool down the A/T fluid.

Revision; 2004 April AT-50 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

CAUTION:
Run the engine at idle for at least one minute. A
Stall speed: 2,600 - 2,900 rpm
Judgement Stall Test B
Selector lever position
Expected problem location
D, M R
AT
● Forward brake
● Forward one-way clutch
H O
● 1st one-way clutch
D
Stall rotation ● 3rd one-way clutch
O H ● Reverse brake
L L ● Engine and torque converter one-way clutch E
H H ● Line pressure low
O: Stall speed within standard value position
H: Stall speed higher than standard value F
L: Stall speed lower than standard value

Stall test standard value position

G
Does not shift-up D, M position 1 → 2 Slipping in 2nd, 3rd or 4th gear Direct clutch slippage
Does not shift-up D, M position 2 → 3 Slipping in 3rd, 4th or 5th gear High and low reverse clutch slippage
Does not shift-up D, M position 3 → 4 Slipping in 4th or 5th gear Input clutch slippage H
Does not shift-up D, M position 4 → 5 Slipping in 5th gear Front brake slippage

LINE PRESSURE TEST I

Line Pressure Test Port

SCIA1291E

Line Pressure Test Procedure M

1. Inspect the amount of engine oil and replenish if necessary.
2. Drive the car for about 10 minutes to warm it up so that the A/T fluid reaches in range of 50 to 80°C (122
to 176°F), then inspect the amount of A/T fluid and replenish if necessary.
NOTE:
The automatic fluid temperature rises in range of 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F) during 10 minutes of
driving.

Revision; 2004 April AT-51 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

3. After warming up A/T, remove the oil pressure detection plug

and install the oil pressure gauge.
CAUTION:
When using the oil pressure gauge, be sure to use the O-
ring attached to the oil pressure detection plug.

SCIA5309E

4. Securely engage the parking brake so that the tires do not turn.

SCIA1224E

5. Start the engine, then measure the line pressure at both idle and
the stall speed.
CAUTION:
● Keep the brake pedal pressed all the way down during
measurement.
● When measuring the line pressure at the stall speed,
refer to AT-50, "STALL TEST" .
6. After the measurements are complete, install the oil pressure
detection plug and tighten to the regulation torque below.
:6.3 N·m (0.64 kg-m, 56 in-lb) SAT493G

CAUTION:
Do not reuse the O-ring.
Line Pressure
Line pressure kPa (kg/cm2 , psi)
Engine speed
“R” position “D” and “M” positions
idle speed 392 - 441 (4.0 - 4.5, 57 - 64) 373 - 422 (3.8 - 4.3, 54 - 61)
stall speed 1,700 - 1,890 (17.3 - 19.3, 247 - 274) 1,310 - 1,500 (13.3 - 15.3, 190 - 218)

Revision; 2004 April AT-52 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Judgement of Line Pressure Test

Judgement Possible cause
A

Possible causes include malfunctions in the pressure supply system and low oil pump output.
For example
● Oil pump wear
B
Low for all positions
(P, R, N, D, M) ● Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking or spring fatigue
● Oil strainer Þ oil pump Þ pressure regulator valve passage oil leak
AT
● Engine idle speed too low
Only low for a spe- Possible causes include an oil pressure leak in a passage or device related to the position after
Idle speed cific position the pressure is distributed by the manual valve.
D
Possible causes include a sensor malfunction or malfunction in the line pressure adjustment func-
tion.
For example
● Accelerator pedal position signal malfunction E
High
● ATF temperature sensor malfunction
● Line pressure solenoid malfunction (sticking in “OFF” state, filter clog, cut line)
● Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking
F

Possible causes include a sensor malfunction or malfunction in the line pressure adjustment func-
tion.
For example G
Oil pressure does
● Accelerator pedal position signal malfunction
not rise higher than
the oil pressure for ● TCM breakdown
idle. ● Line pressure solenoid malfunction (shorting, sticking in“ ON” state)
H
● Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking
● Pilot valve sticking or pilot filter clogged
I
Stall speed Possible causes include malfunctions in the pressure supply system and malfunction in the line
pressure adjustment function.
The pressure rises, For example
but does not enter ● Accelerator pedal position signal malfunction J
the standard posi-
● Line pressure solenoid malfunction (sticking, filter clog)
tion.
● Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking
● Pilot valve sticking or pilot filter clogged
K

Only low for a spe- Possible causes include an oil pressure leak in a passage or device related to the position after
cific position the pressure is distributed by the manual valve.
L
ROAD TEST
Description
● The road test inspects overall performance of the A/T and analyzes possible malfunction causes. M
● The road test is carried out in the following three stages.
1. Check before engine is started. Refer to AT-54 .
2. Check at idle. Refer to AT-54 .
3. Cruise test
● Inspect all the items from Part 1 to Part 3. Refer to AT-55 , AT-57 , AT-58 .

● Before beginning the road test, check the test procedure and inspection items.
● Test all inspection items until the symptom is uncovered. Diagnose NG items when all road tests are com-
plete.

Revision; 2004 April AT-53 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Check Before Engine is Started ACS002BA

1. CHECK A/T CHECK INDICATOR LAMP

1. Park vehicle on level surface.
2. Move selector lever to “P” position.
3. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position. (Do not start engine.)
Does A/T CHECK indicator lamp light up for about 2 seconds?
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> Stop the road test and go to AT-241, "A/T CHECK Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On" .

2. CHECK A/T CHECK INDICATOR LAMP

Does A/T CHECK indicator lamp flash for about 8 seconds?

Yes >> For TCM fail-safe mode, carry out self-diagnostics and record all NG items on the diagnostics
worksheet. Refer to AT-86 , AT-96 .
No >> 1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
2. Go to AT-54, "Check at Idle" .
Check at Idle ACS002BB

1. CHECK STARTING THE ENGINE

1. Park vehicle on level surface.
2. Move selector lever to “P” position.
3. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
4. Turn ignition switch to “START” position.
Does the engine start?
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> Stop the road test and go to AT-243, "Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” or “N” Position" .

2. CHECK STARTING THE ENGINE

1. Turn ignition switch to “ACC” position.
2. Move selector lever in “D” or “R” position.
3. Turn ignition switch to “START” position.
Does the engine start in either position?
Yes >> Stop the road test and go to AT-243, "Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” or “N” Position" .
No >> GO TO 3.

3. CHECK “P” POSITION FUNCTIONS

1. Move selector lever to “P” position.
2. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
3. Disengage the parking brake.
4. Push the vehicle forward or backward.
5. Engage the parking brake.
When you push the vehicle with disengaging the parking brake, does it move?
Yes >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle moves when pushed in “P” position” on the diagnostics worksheet,
then continue the road test.
No >> GO TO 4.

Revision; 2004 April AT-54 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

4. CHECK “N” POSITION FUNCTIONS A

1. Start the engine.
2. Move selector lever to “N” position.
3. Disengage the parking brake. B
Does vehicle move forward or backward?
Yes >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle moves in “N” position” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue
the road test. AT
No >> GO TO 5.

5. CHECK SHIFT SHOCK D

1. Engage the brake.

2. Move selector lever to “D” position. E
When the transmission is shifted from “N” to “D”, is there an excessive shock?
Yes >> Enter a check mark at “Large shock when shifted from N to D” on the diagnostics worksheet, then
continue the road test. F
No >> GO TO 6.

6. CHECK “R” POSITION FUNCTIONS

G
1. Engage the brake.
2. Move selector lever to “R” position.
3. Disengage the brake for 4 to 5 seconds. H
Does the vehicle creep backward?
Yes >> GO TO 7.
No >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not creep backward in R position” on the diagnostics work- I
sheet, then continue the road test.

7. CHECK “D” POSITION FUNCTIONS J

Inspect whether the vehicle moves forward when the transmission is put into the “D” position.
Does the vehicle move forward in the “D” position?
K
Yes >> Go to AT-55, "Cruise Test - Part 1" , AT-57, "Cruise Test - Part 2" , and AT-58, "Cruise Test - Part
3" .
No >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not move forward in D position” on the diagnostics work-
sheet, then continue the road test. L

Cruise Test - Part 1 ACS002BC

Cruise test Part 1 M

1. CHECK STARTING OUT FROM D1
1. Drive the vehicle for about 10 minutes to warm up the engine oil and A/T fluid.
Appropriate temperature for the A/T fluid: 50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F)
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface.
3. Move selector lever to “P” position.
4. Start the engine.
5. Move selector lever to “D” position.
6. Press the accelerator pedal about half way down to accelerate the vehicle.
With CONSULT-II
Read off the gear positions.
Starts from D1?
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle cannot be started from D1” on the diagnostics worksheet, then
continue the road test.

Revision; 2004 April AT-55 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

2. CHECK SHIFT-UP D1 → D2
Press down the accelerator pedal about half way and inspect if the vehicle shifts up (D1 → D2) at the appropri-
ate speed.
● Refer to AT-59 .
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear position, throttle degree of opening, and vehicle speed.
Does the A/T shift up D1 → D2 at the correct speed?
Yes >> GO TO 3.
No >> Enter a check mark at “A/T does not shift D1 → D2” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue
the road test.

3. CHECK SHIFT-UP D2 → D3
Press down the accelerator pedal about half way and inspect if the vehicle shifts up (D2 → D3) at the appropri-
ate speed.
● Refer to AT-59 .
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear position, throttle degree of opening, and vehicle speed.
Does the A/T shift up D2 → D3 at the correct speed?
Yes >> GO TO 4.
No >> Enter a check mark at “A/T does not shift D2 → D3” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue
the road test.

4. CHECK SHIFT-UP D3 → D4
Press down the accelerator pedal about half way and inspect if the vehicle shifts up (D3 → D4) at the appropri-
ate speed.
● Refer to AT-59 .
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear position, throttle degree of opening, and vehicle speed.
Does the A/T shift up D3 → D4 at the correct speed?
Yes >> GO TO 5.
No >> Enter a check mark at “A/T does not shift D3 → D4” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue
the road test.

5. CHECK SHIFT-UP D4 → D5
Press down the accelerator pedal about half way and inspect if the vehicle shifts up (D4 → D5) at the appropri-
ate speed.
● Refer to AT-59 .
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear position, throttle degree of opening, and vehicle speed.
Does the A/T shift up D4 → D5 at the correct speed?
Yes >> GO TO 6.
No >> Enter a check mark at “A/T does not shift D4 → D5” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue
the road test.

Revision; 2004 April AT-56 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

6. CHECK LOCK-UP A
When releasing accelerator pedal from D5, check lock-up from D5 to L/U.
● Refer to AT-59 .
B
With CONSULT-II
Select “TCC SOLENOID 0.00A” with the “MAIN SIGNAL” mode for A/T. Refer to AT-86, "CONSULT-II REF-
ERENCE VALUE" .
AT
Does it lock-up?
Yes >> GO TO 7.
No >> Enter a check mark at “A/T does not perform lock-up” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue
the road test. D

7. CHECK LOCK-UP HOLD

E

Does it maintain lock-up status?

Yes >> GO TO 8. F
No >> Enter a check mark at “A/T hold does not lock-up condition” on the diagnostics worksheet, then
continue the road test.

8. CHECK LOCK-UP RELEASE G

Check lock-up cancellation by depressing brake pedal lightly to decelerate.

With CONSULT-II H
Select “TCC SOLENOID 0.00A” with the “MAIN SIGNAL” mode for A/T. Refer to AT-86, "CONSULT-II REF-
ERENCE VALUE" .
Does lock-up cancel? I
Yes >> GO TO 9.
No >> Enter a check mark at “Lock-up is not released” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the
road test. J
9. CHECK SHIFT-DOWN D5 → D4
Decelerate by pressing lightly on the brake pedal. K
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear position and engine speed.
When the A/T shift down D5 → D4, does the engine speed drop smoothly back to idle? L
Yes >> 1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Go to Cruise test - Part 2 (Refer to AT-57 ).
M
No >> Enter a check mark at “A/T does not shift down” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the
road test. Go to Cruise test - Part 2 (Refer to AT-57 ).
Cruise Test - Part 2 ACS002BD

Cruise test Part 2

1. CHECK STARTING FROM D1
1. Move selector lever the “D” position.
2. Accelerate at half throttle.
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear position.
Does it start from D1?
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle cannot be started from D1” on the diagnostics worksheet, then
continue the road test.

Revision; 2004 April AT-57 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

2. CHECK SHIFT-UP D1 → D2
Press the accelerator pedal down all the way and inspect whether or not the transmission shifts up (D1 → D2)
at the correct speed.
● Refer to AT-59 .
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear position, throttle position and vehicle speed.
Does the A/T shift-up D1 → D2 at the correct speed?
Yes >> GO TO 3.
No >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not shift D1 → D2” on the diagnostics worksheet, then con-
tinue the road test.

3. CHECK SHIFT-UP D2 → D3
Press the accelerator pedal down all the way and inspect whether or not the transmission shifts up (D2 → D3)
at the correct speed.
● Refer to AT-59 .
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear position, throttle position and vehicle speed.
Does the A/T shift-up D2 → D3 at the correct speed?
Yes >> GO TO 4.
No >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not shift D2 → D3” on the diagnostics worksheet, then con-
tinue the road test.

4. CHECK SHIFT-UP D3 → D4 AND ENGINE BRAKE

When the transmission changes speed D3 → D4, return the accelerator pedal.
Does the A/T shift-up D3 → D4 and apply the engine brake?
Yes >> 1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Go to Cruise test - Part 3 (Refer to AT-58 ).
No >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not shift D3 → D4” on the diagnostics worksheet, then con-
tinue the road test.
Cruise Test - Part 3 ACS002BE

Cruise test Part 3

1. MANUAL MODE FUNCTION
Move to manual mode from D position.
Does it switch to manual mode?
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> Continue road test and add checkmark to “Cannot be changed to manual mode” on diagnostics
worksheet.

2. CHECK SHIFT-DOWN
During manual mode driving, is downshift from 5M → 4M → 3M → 2M → 1M performed?
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear position.
Is downshifting correctly performed?
Yes >> GO TO 3.
No >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not shift” at the corresponding position (5th → 4th, 4th → 3rd,
3rd → 2nd, 2nd → 1st) on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test.

Revision; 2004 April AT-58 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

3. CHECK ENGINE BRAKE A

Does engine braking effectively reduce speed in M1 position?

Yes >> 1. Stop the vehicle. B
2. Carry out the self-diagnostics. Refer to AT-86, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH
CONSULT-II)" , AT-96, "Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT-II" .
No >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not decelerate by engine brake” on the diagnostics work- AT
sheet, then continue trouble diagnosis.
Vehicle Speed When Shifting Gears ACS002BF
D
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
Throttle position
D1 →D2 D2 →D3 D3 →D4 D4 →D5 D5 →D4 D4 →D3 D3 →D2 D2 →D1
E
58 - 62 90 - 98 140 - 150 201 - 211 197 - 207 122 - 132 74 - 82 34 - 48
Full throttle
(36 - 39) (56 - 61) (87 - 93) (125 - 131) (122 - 129) (76 - 83) (46 - 51) (23 - 25)
46 - 50 71 - 79 107 - 117 135 - 145 88 - 98 63 - 73 29 - 37 11 - 15
Half throttle F
(29 - 31) (44 - 49) (66 - 73) (84 - 90) (55 - 61) (39 - 45) (18 - 23) (7 - 9)
● At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening.

Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing Complete Lock-Up ACS002BG G

Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
Throttle position
Lock-up “ON” Lock-up “OFF”
H
Closed throttle 56 - 64 (35 - 40) 53 - 61 (33 - 38)
Half throttle 168 - 176 (104 - 109) 131 - 139 (81 - 86)
● At closed throttle, the accelerator opening is less than 1/8 condition. I
● At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening.

Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing Slip Lock-Up ACS002BH

J
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
Throttle position Gear position
Slip lock-up “ON” Slip lock-up “OFF”
K
4th 37 - 45 (23 - 28) 34 - 42 (21 - 26)
Closed throttle
5th 44 - 52 (27 - 32) 41 - 49 (25 - 30)

● At closed throttle, the accelerator opening is less than 1/8 condition. L

Revision; 2004 April AT-59 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Symptom Chart ACS002BI

The diagnostics item numbers show the sequence for inspection. Inspect in order from Item 1.
Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference page
1. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-110, AT-157
2. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-144
Shift point is high in
ON vehicle 3. CAN communication line AT-98
D position.
4. ATF temperature sensor AT-146
5. Control valve assembly AT-294
1. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-110, AT-157

Shift point is low in 2. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-144

ON vehicle
D position. 3. CAN communication line AT-98
4. Control valve assembly AT-294
1. Engine idle speed EC-34
2. Engine speed signal AT-115
3. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-144
4. Control linkage adjustment AT-284
Large shock. (“N” 5. ATF temperature sensor AT-146
→“ D” position) ON vehicle
6. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve AT-221, AT-179
Refer to AT-246,
"Large Shock (“N” 7. CAN communication line AT-98
to “D” Position)" .
8. Fluid level and state AT-50
9. Line pressure test AT-51
10. Control valve assembly AT-294
11. Forward brake* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Con-
OFF vehicle AT-319
dition Check" .)
1. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-144
2. Control linkage adjustment AT-284
3. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve AT-229, AT-189
4. CAN communication line AT-98
Shock is too large ON vehicle 5. Engine speed signal AT-115
when changing D1
→ D2 or M1 → M2 6. Turbine revolution sensor AT-152
. 7. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-110, AT-157
8. Fluid level and state AT-50
9. Control valve assembly AT-294
10. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condi-
OFF vehicle AT-350
tion Check" .)
1. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-144
2. Control linkage adjustment AT-284
3. ATF pressure switch 6, high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve AT-233, AT-198
4. CAN communication line AT-98
Shock is too large ON vehicle 5. Engine speed signal AT-115
when changing D2
→ D3 or M2 → M3 6. Turbine revolution sensor AT-152
. 7. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-110, AT-157
8. Fluid level and state AT-50
9. Control valve assembly AT-294
10. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50,
OFF vehicle AT-349
"Fluid Condition Check" .)

Revision; 2004 April AT-60 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference page

A
1. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-144
2. Control linkage adjustment AT-284
3. ATF pressure switch 3 and input clutch solenoid valve AT-225, AT-170 B
4. CAN communication line AT-98

Shock is too large ON vehicle 5. Engine speed signal AT-115

when changing D3 6. Turbine revolution sensor AT-152 AT
→ D4 or M3 → M4 .
7. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-110, AT-157
8. Fluid level and state AT-50
D
9. Control valve assembly AT-294
10. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condi-
OFF vehicle AT-339
tion Check" .) E
1. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-144
2. Control linkage adjustment AT-284
3. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve AT-221, AT-179 F
4. CAN communication line AT-98
ON vehicle 5. Engine speed signal AT-115
G
Shock is too large 6. Turbine revolution sensor AT-152
when changing D4
7. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-110, AT-157
→ D5 or M4 → M5 .
8. Fluid level and state AT-50 H
9. Control valve assembly AT-294
10. Front brake [brake band (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50,
AT-311 I
"Fluid Condition Check" .)]
OFF vehicle
11. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer toAT-50, "Fluid Condition
AT-339
Check" .)
J
1. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-144
2. Control linkage adjustment AT-284
3. CAN communication line AT-98 K
4. Engine speed signal AT-115
ON vehicle
5. Turbine revolution sensor AT-152
6. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-110, AT-157 L
Shock is too large 7. Fluid level and state AT-50
for downshift when
accelerator pedal is 8. Control valve assembly AT-294
M
pressed. 9. Front brake [brake band (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50,
AT-311
"Fluid Condition Check" .)]
10. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer toAT-50, "Fluid Condition
AT-339
Check" .)
OFF vehicle
11. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50,
AT-349
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
12. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer toAT-50, "Fluid Condi-
AT-350
tion Check" .)

Revision; 2004 April AT-61 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference page

1. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-144
2. Control linkage adjustment AT-284
3. Engine speed signal AT-115
4. CAN communication line AT-98
ON vehicle
5. Turbine revolution sensor AT-152
6. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-110, AT-157
Shock is too large 7. Fluid level and state AT-50
for upshift when
accelerator pedal is 8. Control valve assembly AT-294
released. 9. Front brake [brake band (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50,
AT-311
"Fluid Condition Check" .)]
10. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condi-
AT-339
tion Check" .)
OFF vehicle
11. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer toAT-50,
AT-349
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
12. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condi-
AT-350
tion Check" .)
1. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-144
2. Control linkage adjustment AT-284
3. Engine speed signal AT-115
4. CAN communication line AT-98
ON vehicle 5. Turbine revolution sensor AT-152
Shock is too large
for lock-up. 6. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-110, AT-157
7. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-117
8. Fluid level and state AT-50
9. Control valve assembly AT-294
10. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid
OFF vehicle AT-319
Condition Check" .)
1. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-144
2. Control linkage adjustment AT-284
ON vehicle 3. CAN communication line AT-98
4. Fluid level and state AT-50
5. Control valve assembly AT-294
Shock is too large
6. Front brake [brake band (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50,
during engine AT-311
"Fluid Condition Check" .)]
brake.
7. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer toAT-50, "Fluid Condition
AT-339
Check" .)
OFF vehicle
8. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50,
AT-349
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
9. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer toAT-50, "Fluid Condition
AT-350
Check" .)

Revision; 2004 April AT-62 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference page

A
1. Fluid level and state AT-50
2. Engine speed signal AT-115
3. Turbine revolution sensor AT-152 B
4. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-110, AT-157
ON vehicle
Judder occurs dur- 5. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-144
ing lock-up. AT
6. CAN communication line AT-98
7. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-117
8. Control valve assembly AT-294
D
9. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Con-
OFF vehicle AT-319
dition Check" .)
1. Fluid level and state AT-50 E
2. Engine speed signal AT-115
ON vehicle
3. CAN communication line AT-98
4. Control valve assembly AT-294 F
5. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer toAT-50, "Fluid Con-
AT-319
dition Check" .)
Strange noise in “R”
6. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer toAT-50, "Fluid
G
position. AT-334
Condition Check" .)
7. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condi-
OFF vehicle AT-311 H
tion Check" .)
8. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50,
AT-349
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
9. Reverse brake (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer toAT-50, "Fluid Condi- I
AT-319
tion Check" .)
1. Fluid level and state AT-50
J
2. Engine speed signal AT-115
ON vehicle
3. CAN communication line AT-98
4. Control valve assembly AT-294 K
Strange noise in “N”
5. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Con-
position. AT-319
dition Check" .)

OFF vehicle
6. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer toAT-50, "Fluid
AT-334 L
Condition Check" .)
7. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer toAT-50, "Fluid Condition
AT-311
Check" .)
M
1. Fluid level and state AT-50
2. Engine speed signal AT-115
ON vehicle
3. CAN communication line AT-98
4. Control valve assembly AT-294
5. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Con-
Strange noise in “D” AT-319
dition Check" .)
position.
6. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid
AT-334
Condition Check" .)
OFF vehicle
7. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condi-
AT-311
tion Check" .)
8. Forward brake* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer toAT-50, "Fluid Condi-
AT-319
tion Check" .)

Revision; 2004 April AT-63 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference page

1. Fluid level and state AT-50
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-110, AT-157
3. Direct clutch solenoid valve AT-189
ON vehicle
4. Line pressure test AT-51
5. CAN communication line AT-98
6. Control valve assembly AT-294
7. 3rd one-way clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid
AT-336
When D or M posi- Condition Check" .)
tion, remains in 1st 8. 1st one-way clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid
gear. AT-344
Condition Check" .)
9. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condi-
AT-311
tion Check" .)
OFF vehicle
10. Reverse brake (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer toAT-50, "Fluid Condi-
AT-319
tion Check" .)
11. Forward one-way clutch* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer toAT-50,
AT-319
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
12. Forward brake* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer toAT-50, "Fluid Con-
AT-319
dition Check" .)
1. Fluid level and state AT-50
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-110 , AT-157
3. Low coast brake solenoid valve AT-208
ON vehicle
4. Line pressure test AT-51
5. CAN communication line AT-98

When D or M posi- 6. Control valve assembly AT-294

tion, remains in 2nd 7. 3rd one-way clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid
gear. AT-336
Condition Check" .)
8. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condi-
AT-311
tion Check" .)
OFF vehicle
9. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition
AT-350
Check" .)
10. Forward brake* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer toAT-50, "Fluid Con-
AT-319
dition Check" .)
1. Fluid level and state AT-50
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-110, AT-157
ON vehicle 3. Line pressure test AT-51
4. CAN communication line AT-98
5. Control valve assembly AT-294

When D or M posi- 6. 3rd one-way clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid
AT-336
tion, remains in 3rd Condition Check" .)
gear. 7. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condi-
AT-311
tion Check" .)
8. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer toAT-50,
OFF vehicle AT-349
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
9. Forward one-way clutch* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50,
AT-319
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
10. Forward brake* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer toAT-50, "Fluid Con-
AT-319
dition Check" .)

Revision; 2004 April AT-64 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference page

A
1. Fluid level and state AT-50
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-110, AT-157
3. ATF pressure switch 3 and input clutch solenoid valve AT-225, AT-170 B
4. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve AT-229,AT-189
5. ATF pressure switch 6, high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve AT-233, AT-198
ON vehicle AT
6. Low coast brake solenoid valve AT-208
7. Front brake solenoid valve AT-179

When D or M posi- 8. Line pressure test AT-51

D
tion, remains in 4th 9. CAN communication line AT-98
gear.
10. Control valve assembly AT-294
11. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition E
AT-339
Check" .)
12. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer toAT-50, "Fluid Condi-
AT-311
tion Check" .) F
OFF vehicle
13. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50,
AT-349
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
14. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condi-
AT-350
G
tion Check" .)
1. Fluid level and state AT-50
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-110, AT-157 H
3. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve AT-221, AT-179
ON vehicle
4. Line pressure test AT-51
I
5. CAN communication line AT-98

When D or M posi- 6. Control valve assembly AT-294

tion, remains in 5th 7. Front brake [brake band (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, J
gear. AT-319
"Fluid Condition Check" .)]
8. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition
AT-339
Check" .) K
OFF vehicle
9. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condi-
AT-311
tion Check" .)
10. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50,
AT-349 L
"Fluid Condition Check" .)

Revision; 2004 April AT-65 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference page

1. Fluid level and state AT-50
2. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-144
ON vehicle 3. Line pressure test AT-51
4. CAN communication line AT-98
5. Control valve assembly AT-294
6. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Con-
AT-319
dition Check" .)
7. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer toAT-50, "Fluid
AT-334
Vehicle cannot be Condition Check" .)
started from D1 .
8. 3rd one-way clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid
Refer toAT-255, AT-336
Condition Check" .)
"Vehicle Cannot Be
Started From D1" . 9. 1st one-way clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid
AT-344
Condition Check" .)
OFF vehicle
10. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condi-
AT-311
tion Check" .)
11. Reverse brake (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Con-
AT-319
dition Check" .)
12. Forward one-way clutch* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50,
AT-319
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
13. Forward brake* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer toAT-50, "Fluid Con-
AT-319
dition Check" .)
1. Fluid level and state AT-50
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-110, AT-157
Gear does not
change from D1 → 3. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve AT-229, AT-189
D2 or from M1 → ON vehicle
4. Line pressure test AT-51
M2 .
Refer to AT-257, "A/ 5. CAN communication line AT-98
T Does Not Shift:
6. Control valve assembly AT-294
D1 → D2" .
7. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition
OFF vehicle AT-350
Check" .)
1. Fluid level and state AT-50
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-110, AT-157
Gear does not
change from D2 → 3. ATF pressure switch 6, high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve AT-233, AT-198
D3 or from M2 → ON vehicle
4. Line pressure test AT-51
M3 .
Refer toAT-259, "A/ 5. CAN communication line AT-98
T Does Not Shift:
6. Control valve assembly AT-294
D2 → D3" .
7. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50,
OFF vehicle AT-349
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
1. Fluid level and state AT-50
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-110, AT-157
Gear does not 3. ATF pressure switch 3 and input clutch solenoid valve AT-225, AT-170
change from D3 →
D4 or from M3 → ON vehicle 4. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve AT-221, AT-179
M4 . 5. Line pressure test AT-51
Refer toAT-262, "A/
T Does Not Shift: 6. CAN communication line AT-98
D3 → D4" . 7. Control valve assembly AT-294
8. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition
OFF vehicle AT-339
Check" .)

Revision; 2004 April AT-66 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference page

A
1. Fluid level and state AT-50
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-110, AT-157
3. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve AT-221, AT-179 B
Gear does not 4. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve AT-229, AT-189
ON vehicle
change from D4 → 5. Turbine revolution sensor AT-152
D5 or from M4 → AT
M5 . 6. Line pressure test AT-51
Refer toAT-264, "A/ 7. CAN communication line AT-98
T Does Not Shift:
D4 → D5 " . 8. Control valve assembly AT-294
D
9. Front brake [brake band (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50,
AT-319
"Fluid Condition Check" .)]
OFF vehicle
10. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condi- E
AT-339
tion Check" .)
1. Fluid level and state AT-50
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-110, AT-157 F
3. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve AT-221, AT-179
In D or M range,
ON vehicle 4. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve AT-229, AT-189
does not downshift
to 4th gear. 5. CAN communication line AT-98
G
Refer to AT-273, "A/
6. Line pressure test AT-51
T Does Not Shift:
5th Gear → 4th 7. Control valve assembly AT-294 H
Gear" .
8. Front brake [brake band (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50,
AT-319
"Fluid Condition Check" .)]
OFF vehicle
9. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition I
AT-339
Check" .)
1. Fluid level and state AT-50
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-110, AT-157 J
In D or M range, 3. ATF pressure switch 3 and input clutch solenoid valve AT-225, AT-170
does not downshift
to 3rd gear. ON vehicle 4. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve AT-221, AT-179
Refer toAT-275, "A/ K
5. CAN communication line AT-98
T Does Not Shift:
4th Gear → 3rd 6. Line pressure test AT-51
Gear" . 7. Control valve assembly AT-294 L
8. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer toAT-50, "Fluid Condition
OFF vehicle AT-339
Check" .)
1. Fluid level and state AT-50 M
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-110, AT-157
In D or M range,
does not downshift 3. ATF pressure switch 6, high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve AT-233, AT-198
to 2nd gear. ON vehicle
4. CAN communication line AT-98
Refer toAT-277, "A/
T Does Not Shift: 5. Line pressure test AT-51
3rd Gear → 2nd
6. Control valve assembly AT-294
Gear" .
7. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer toAT-50,
OFF vehicle AT-349
"Fluid Condition Check" .)

Revision; 2004 April AT-67 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference page

1. Fluid level and state AT-50
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-110, AT-157
In D or M range,
does not downshift 3. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve AT-229, AT-189
to 1st gear. ON vehicle
4. CAN communication line AT-98
Refer toAT-279, "A/
T Does Not Shift: 5. Line pressure test AT-51
2nd Gear → 1st
6. Control valve assembly AT-294
Gear" .
7. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition
OFF vehicle AT-350
Check" .)
1. Fluid level and state AT-50
2. Line pressure test AT-51
3. Engine speed signal AT-115
ON vehicle 4. Turbine revolution sensor AT-152
Does not lock-up.
5. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-117
Refer to AT-266, "A/
T Does Not Per- 6. CAN communication line AT-98
form Lock-Up" .
7. Control valve assembly AT-294
8. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer toAT-50, "Fluid Con-
AT-319
dition Check" .)
OFF vehicle
9. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer toAT-50, "Fluid
AT-334
Condition Check" .)
1. Fluid level and state AT-50
2. Line pressure test AT-51
3. Engine speed signal AT-115
Does not hold lock- ON vehicle 4. Turbine revolution sensor AT-152
up condition.
5. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-117
Refer toAT-269, "A/
T Does Not Hold 6. CAN communication line AT-98
Lock-Up Condi-
7. Control valve assembly AT-294
tion" .
8. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Con-
AT-319
dition Check" .)
OFF vehicle
9. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid
AT-334
Condition Check" .)
1. Fluid level and state AT-50
2. Line pressure test AT-51
3. Engine speed signal AT-115
ON vehicle 4. Turbine revolution sensor AT-152
Lock-up is not
released. 5. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-117
Refer toAT-270,
6. CAN communication line AT-98
"Lock-Up Is Not
Released" . 7. Control valve assembly AT-294
8. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Con-
AT-319
dition Check" .)
OFF vehicle
9. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid
AT-334
Condition Check" .)

Revision; 2004 April AT-68 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference page

A
1. PNP switch AT-105
2. Fluid level and state AT-50
3. Control linkage adjustment AT-284 B
ON vehicle 4. Manual mode switch AT-217
Does not change
M5 → M4. 5. ATF pressure switch 1 AT-221
6. CAN communication line AT-98 AT
7. Control valve assembly AT-294
8. Front brake [brake band (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50,
OFF vehicle AT-319 D
"Fluid Condition Check" .)]
1. PNP switch AT-105
2. Fluid level and state AT-50 E
3. Control linkage adjustment AT-284
ON vehicle 4. Manual mode switch AT-217
5. ATF pressure switch 1 and ATF pressure switch 3 AT-221, AT-225 F
Does not change
M4 → M3. 6. CAN communication line AT-98
7. Control valve assembly AT-294
G
8. Front brake [brake band (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50,
AT-319
"Fluid Condition Check" .)]
OFF vehicle
9. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition H
AT-339
Check" .)
1. PNP switch AT-105
2. Fluid level and state AT-50 I
3. Control linkage adjustment AT-284
ON vehicle 4. Manual mode switch AT-217
J
5. ATF pressure switch 6 AT-233

Does not change 6. CAN communication line AT-98

M3 → M2. 7. Control valve assembly AT-294 K
8. Front brake [brake band (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50,
AT-319
"Fluid Condition Check" .)]
9. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition L
OFF vehicle AT-339
Check" .)
10. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50,
AT-349
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
M
1. PNP switch AT-105
2. Fluid level and state AT-50
3. Control linkage adjustment AT-284
ON vehicle 4. Manual mode switch AT-217
5. ATF pressure switch 5 AT-229

Does not change 6. CAN communication line AT-98

M2 → M1. 7. Control valve assembly AT-294
8. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition
AT-339
Check" .)
9. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50,
OFF vehicle AT-349
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
10. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condi-
AT-350
tion Check" .)

Revision; 2004 April AT-69 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference page

1. Fluid level and state AT-50
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-110, AT-157
3. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve AT-229, AT-189
ON vehicle
4. CAN communication line AT-98
5. Line pressure test AT-51
6. Control valve assembly AT-294

No shock at all or 7. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Con-
AT-319
the clutch slips dition Check" .)
when vehicle 8. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid
changes speed D1 AT-334
Condition Check" .)
→ D2 or M1 → M2 .
9. 3rd one-way clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid
AT-336
Condition Check" .)
OFF vehicle
10. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condi-
AT-311
tion Check" .)
11. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condi-
AT-350
tion Check" .)
12. Forward brake* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Con-
AT-319
dition Check" .)
1. Fluid level and state AT-50
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-110, AT-157
3. ATF pressure switch 6, high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve AT-233, AT-198
ON vehicle
4. CAN communication line AT-98
5. Line pressure test AT-51
6. Control valve assembly AT-294
7. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Con-
AT-319
dition Check" .)
No shock at all or
the clutch slips 8. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid
AT-334
when vehicle Condition Check" .)
changes speed D2
9. 3rd one-way clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid
→ D3 or M2 → M3 . AT-336
Condition Check" .)
10. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condi-
OFF vehicle AT-311
tion Check" .)
11. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50,
AT-349
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
12. Forward one-way clutch* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50,
AT-319
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
13. Forward brake* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Con-
AT-319
dition Check" .)

Revision; 2004 April AT-70 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference page

A
1. Fluid level and state AT-50
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-110, AT-157
3. ATF pressure switch 3 and input clutch solenoid valve AT-225, AT-170 B
ON vehicle 4. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve AT-221, AT-179
5. CAN communication line AT-98
6. Line pressure test AT-51 AT
7. Control valve assembly AT-294
No shock at all or
8. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Con-
the clutch slips AT-319 D
dition Check" .)
when vehicle
changes speed D3 9. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid
AT-334
→ D4 or M3 → M4 . Condition Check" .)
E
10. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condi-
AT-339
tion Check" .)
OFF vehicle
11. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condi-
AT-311 F
tion Check" .)
12. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50,
AT-349
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
G
13. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condi-
AT-350
tion Check" .)
1. Fluid level and state AT-50
H
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-110, AT-157
3. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve AT-221, AT-179
ON vehicle 4. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve AT-229, AT-189 I
5. CAN communication line AT-98
6. Line pressure test AT-51
J
7. Control valve assembly AT-294
No shock at all or
8. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Con-
the clutch slips AT-319
dition Check" .)
when vehicle K
changes speed D4 9. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid
AT-334
→ D5 or M4 → M5 . Condition Check" .)
10. Front brake [brake band (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50,
"Fluid Condition Check" .)]
AT-319 L
OFF vehicle
11. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition
AT-339
Check" .)
M
12. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condi-
AT-311
tion Check" .)
13. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50,
AT-349
"Fluid Condition Check" .)

Revision; 2004 April AT-71 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference page

1. Fluid level and state AT-50
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-110, AT-157
3. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve AT-221, AT-179
ON vehicle 4. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve AT-229, AT-189
5. CAN communication line AT-98
6. Line pressure test AT-51
When you press 7. Control valve assembly AT-294
the accelerator
8. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Con-
pedal and shift AT-319
dition Check" .)
speed D5 → D4 or
M5 → M4 the 9. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid
AT-334
engine idles or the Condition Check" .)
transmission slips.
10. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condi-
AT-339
tion Check" .)
OFF vehicle
11. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condi-
AT-311
tion Check" .)
12. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50,
AT-349
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
13. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condi-
AT-350
tion Check" .)
1. Fluid level and state AT-50
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-110, AT-157
3. ATF pressure switch 3 and input clutch solenoid valve AT-225, AT-170
ON vehicle 4. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve AT-221, AT-179
5. CAN communication line AT-98
6. Line pressure test AT-51
7. Control valve assembly AT-294
When you press 8. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Con-
the accelerator AT-319
dition Check" .)
pedal and shift
speed D4 → D3 or 9. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid
AT-334
M4 → M3 the Condition Check" .)
engine idles or the 10. 3rd one-way clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid
transmission slips. AT-336
Condition Check" .)
11. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condi-
OFF vehicle AT-311
tion Check" .)
12. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50,
AT-349
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
13. Forward one-way clutch* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50,
AT-319
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
14. Forward brake* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Con-
AT-319
dition Check" .)

Revision; 2004 April AT-72 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference page

A
1. Fluid level and state AT-50
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-110, AT-157
3. ATF pressure switch 6, high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve AT-233, AT-198 B
ON vehicle 4. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve AT-229, AT-189
5. CAN communication line AT-98
6. Line pressure test AT-51 AT
When you press 7. Control valve assembly AT-294
the accelerator
8. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Con-
pedal and shift AT-319 D
dition Check" .)
speed D3 → D2 or
M3 → M2 the 9. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid
AT-334
engine idles or the Condition Check" .)
transmission slips. E
10. 3rd one-way clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid
AT-336
Condition Check" .)
OFF vehicle
11. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condi-
AT-311 F
tion Check" .)
12. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condi-
AT-350
tion Check" .)
G
13. Forward brake* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Con-
AT-319
dition Check" .)
1. Fluid level and state AT-50
H
2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-110, AT-157
3. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve AT-229, AT-189
ON vehicle
4. CAN communication line AT-98 I
5. Line pressure test AT-51
6. Control valve assembly AT-294
J
7. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Con-
AT-319
dition Check" .)
When you press
the accelerator 8. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid
AT-334 K
pedal and shift Condition Check" .)
speed D2 → D1 or 9. 3rd one-way clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid
M2 → M1 the AT-336
Condition Check" .)
engine idles or the L
transmission slips. 10. 1st one-way clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid
AT-344
Condition Check" .)
OFF vehicle
11. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condi-
AT-311
tion Check" .) M
12. Reverse brake (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Con-
AT-319
dition Check" .)
13. Forward one-way clutch* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50,
AT-319
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
14. Forward brake* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Con-
AT-319
dition Check" .)

Revision; 2004 April AT-73 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference page

1. PNP switch AT-105
2. Fluid level and state AT-50
3. Control linkage adjustment AT-284
ON vehicle 4. Manual mode switch AT-217
Vehicle dose not
decelerate by 5. ATF pressure switch 5 AT-229
engine brake. 6. CAN communication line AT-98
Refer to AT-281,
"Vehicle Does Not 7. Control valve assembly AT-294
Decelerate By 8. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition
Engine Brake" . AT-339
Check" .)
9. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50,
OFF vehicle AT-349
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
10. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condi-
AT-350
tion Check" .)
1. PNP switch AT-105
2. Fluid level and state AT-50
3. Control linkage adjustment AT-284
ON vehicle 4. Manual mode switch AT-217
Engine brake does
not work M5 → M4. 5. ATF pressure switch 1 AT-221
6. CAN communication line AT-98
7. Control valve assembly AT-294
8. Front brake [brake band (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50,
OFF vehicle AT-319
"Fluid Condition Check" .)]
1. PNP switch AT-105
2. Fluid level and state AT-50
3. Control linkage adjustment AT-284
ON vehicle 4. Manual mode switch AT-217
5. ATF pressure switch 1 and ATF pressure switch 3 AT-221, AT-225
Engine brake does
not work M4 → M3. 6. CAN communication line AT-98
7. Control valve assembly AT-294
8. Front brake [brake band (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50,
AT-319
"Fluid Condition Check" .)]
OFF vehicle
9. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition
AT-339
Check" .)
1. PNP switch AT-105
2. Fluid level and state AT-50
3. Control linkage adjustment AT-284
ON vehicle 4. Manual mode switch AT-217
5. ATF pressure switch 6 AT-233

Engine brake does 6. CAN communication line AT-98

not work M3 → M2. 7. Control valve assembly AT-294
8. Front brake [brake band (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50,
AT-319
"Fluid Condition Check" .)]
9. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition
OFF vehicle AT-339
Check" .)
10. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50,
AT-349
"Fluid Condition Check" .)

Revision; 2004 April AT-74 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference page

A
1. PNP switch AT-105
2. Fluid level and state AT-50
3. Control linkage adjustment AT-284 B
ON vehicle 4. Manual mode switch AT-217
5. ATF pressure switch 5 AT-229
6. CAN communication line AT-98 AT
Engine brake does
not work M2 → M1. 7. Control valve assembly AT-294
8. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition
AT-339 D
Check" .)
9. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50,
OFF vehicle AT-349
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
E
10. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condi-
AT-350
tion Check" .)
1. Fluid level and state AT-50
F
2. Line pressure test AT-51
3. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-144
ON vehicle 4. CAN communication line AT-98 G
5. PNP switch AT-105
6. Control linkage adjustment AT-284
H
7. Control valve assembly AT-294
8. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Con-
AT-319
With selector lever dition Check" .)
I
in D position, accel- 9. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid
eration is extremely AT-334
Condition Check" .)
poor.
10. 1st one-way clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid
AT-344 J
Condition Check" .)
11. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condi-
OFF vehicle AT-311
tion Check" .)
K
12. Reverse brake (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Con-
AT-319
dition Check" .)
13. Forward one-way clutch* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50,
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
AT-319 L
14. Forward brake* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Con-
AT-319
dition Check" .)
M
1. Fluid level and state AT-50
2. Line pressure test AT-51
3. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-144
4. ATF pressure switch 6, high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve AT-233, AT-198
ON vehicle
5. CAN communication line AT-98
With selector lever 6. PNP switch AT-105
in R position, accel-
7. Control linkage adjustment AT-284
eration is extremely
poor. 8. Control valve assembly AT-294
9. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condi-
AT-311
tion Check" .)
10. Output shaft (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condi-
OFF vehicle AT-319
tion Check" .)
11. Reverse brake (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Con-
AT-319
dition Check" .)

Revision; 2004 April AT-75 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference page

1. Fluid level and state AT-50
2. Line pressure test AT-51
ON vehicle 3. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-144
4. CAN communication line AT-98
5. Control valve assembly AT-294
6. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Con-
AT-319
dition Check" .)
7. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid
AT-334
Condition Check" .)
While starting off by
accelerating in 1st, 8. 3rd one-way clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid
AT-336
engine races or Condition Check" .)
slippage occurs.
9. 1st one-way clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid
AT-344
Condition Check" .)
OFF vehicle
10. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condi-
AT-311
tion Check" .)
11. Reverse brake (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Con-
AT-319
dition Check" .)
12. Forward one-way clutch* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50,
AT-319
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
13. Forward brake* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Con-
AT-319
dition Check" .)
1. Fluid level and state AT-50
2. Line pressure test AT-51
3. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-144
ON vehicle
4. CAN communication line AT-98
5. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve AT-229, AT-189
6. Control valve assembly AT-294
7. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Con-
While accelerating AT-319
dition Check" .)
in 2nd, engine
races or slippage 8. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid
AT-334
occurs. Condition Check" .)
9. 3rd one-way clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid
AT-336
Condition Check" .)
OFF vehicle
10. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condi-
AT-311
tion Check" .)
11. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condi-
AT-350
tion Check" .)
12. Forward brake* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Con-
AT-319
dition Check" .)

Revision; 2004 April AT-76 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference page

A
1. Fluid level and state AT-50
2. Line pressure test AT-51
3. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-144 B
ON vehicle
4. CAN communication line AT-98
5. ATF pressure switch 6, high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve AT-233, AT-198
6. Control valve assembly AT-294 AT
7. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Con-
AT-319
dition Check" .)
D
While accelerating 8. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid
AT-334
in 3rd, engine races Condition Check" .)
or slippage occurs.
9. 3rd one-way clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer toAT-50, "Fluid
AT-336 E
Condition Check" .)
10. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condi-
OFF vehicle AT-311
tion Check" .)
11. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, F
AT-349
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
12. Forward one-way clutch* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50,
AT-319
"Fluid Condition Check" .) G
13. Forward brake* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Con-
AT-319
dition Check" .)
1. Fluid level and state AT-50 H
2. Line pressure test AT-51
3. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-144
ON vehicle I
4. CAN communication line AT-98
5. ATF pressure switch 3 and input clutch solenoid valve AT-225, AT-170
6. Control valve assembly AT-294 J
7. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Con-
AT-319
While accelerating dition Check" .)
in 4th, engine races 8. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid K
or slippage occurs. AT-334
Condition Check" .)
9. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition
AT-339
Check" .) L
OFF vehicle
10. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condi-
AT-311
tion Check" .)
11. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, M
AT-349
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
12. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condi-
AT-350
tion Check" .)

Revision; 2004 April AT-77 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference page

1. Fluid level and state AT-50
2. Line pressure test AT-51
3. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-144
ON vehicle
4. CAN communication line AT-98
5. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve AT-221, AT-179
6. Control valve assembly AT-294
7. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Con-
AT-319
While accelerating dition Check" .)
in 5th, engine races 8. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid
or slippage occurs. AT-334
Condition Check" .)
9. Front brake [brake band (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50,
AT-319
"Fluid Condition Check" .)]
OFF vehicle
10. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condi-
AT-339
tion Check" .)
11. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condi-
AT-311
tion Check" .)
12. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50,
AT-349
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
1. Fluid level and state AT-50
2. Line pressure test AT-51
3. Engine speed signal AT-115
ON vehicle 4. Turbine revolution sensor AT-152
5. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-117
Slips at lock-up.
6. CAN communication line AT-98
7. Control valve assembly AT-294
8. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Con-
AT-319
dition Check" .)
OFF vehicle
9. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid
AT-334
Condition Check" .)

Revision; 2004 April AT-78 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference page

A
1. Fluid level and state AT-50
2. Line pressure test AT-51
3. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-144 B
ON vehicle
4. CAN communication line AT-98
5. Direct clutch solenoid valve AT-189
6. Control valve assembly AT-294 AT
7. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Con-
AT-319
dition Check" .)
D
8. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid
AT-334
Condition Check" .)
Maximum speed
low. 9. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition
AT-339 E
Check" .)
10. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condi-
AT-311
tion Check" .)
OFF vehicle
11. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, F
AT-349
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
12. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condi-
AT-350
tion Check" .) G
13. Forward one-way clutch* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50,
AT-319
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
14. Forward brake* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Con- H
AT-319
dition Check" .)
1. Fluid level and state AT-50
2. Line pressure test AT-51 I
3. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-144
4. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve AT-229, AT-189
ON vehicle J
5. PNP switch AT-105
6. CAN communication line AT-98
7. Control linkage adjustment AT-284 K
8. Control valve assembly AT-294
No creep at all. 9. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Con-
Refer toAT-249, dition Check" .)
AT-319 L
"Vehicle Does Not
Creep Backward In 10. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid
AT-334
“R” Position" , AT- Condition Check" .)
251, "Vehicle Does M
11. 1st one-way clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid
Not Creep Forward AT-344
Condition Check" .)
In “D” Position"
12. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condi-
AT-311
tion Check" .)
OFF vehicle
13. Reverse brake (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Con-
AT-319
dition Check" .)
14. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condi-
AT-350
tion Check" .)
15. Forward one-way clutch* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50,
AT-319
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
16. Forward brake* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Con-
AT-319
dition Check" .)

Revision; 2004 April AT-79 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference page

1. Engine idle speed EC-34
ON vehicle 2. CAN communication line AT-98
Extremely large
creep. 3. ATF pressure switch 5 AT-229
4. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Con-
OFF vehicle AT-319
dition Check" .)
With selector lever 1. PNP switch AT-105
in P position, vehi- ON vehicle
2. Control linkage adjustment AT-284
cle does not enter
parking condition
or, with selector
lever in another
position, parking
condition is not 3. Parking pawl components (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50,
OFF vehicle AT-311
cancelled. "Fluid Condition Check" .)
Refer to AT-243, "In
“P” Position, Vehi-
cle Moves When
Pushed" .
1. PNP switch AT-105
2. Fluid level and state AT-50
ON vehicle
3. Control linkage adjustment AT-284
Vehicle runs with
transmission in “ P” 4. Control valve assembly AT-294
position. 5. Parking pawl components (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50,
AT-311
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
OFF vehicle
6. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condi-
AT-311
tion Check" .)
1. PNP switch AT-105
2. Fluid level and state AT-50
ON vehicle
3. Control linkage adjustment AT-284
4. Control valve assembly AT-294
5. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition
AT-339
Vehicle runs with Check" .)
transmission in “N” 6. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condi-
position. AT-311
tion Check" .)
Refer to AT-245, "In
“N” Position, Vehi- 7. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition
AT-350
cle Moves" . Check" .)
OFF vehicle
8. Reverse brake (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condi-
AT-319
tion Check" .)
9. Forward one-way clutch* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50,
AT-319
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
10. Low coast brake* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid
AT-319
Condition Check" .)

Revision; 2004 April AT-80 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference page

A
1. Fluid level and state AT-50
2. Line pressure test AT-51
ON vehicle 3. PNP switch AT-105 B
4. Control linkage adjustment AT-284

Vehicle cannot run 5. Control valve assembly AT-294

in all positions. 6. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid AT
AT-334
Condition Check" .)
7. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condi-
OFF vehicle AT-311
tion Check" .) D
8. Output shaft (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition
AT-319
Check" .)
1. Fluid level and state AT-50 E
2. Line pressure test AT-51
ON vehicle 3. PNP switch AT-105
F
4. Control linkage adjustment AT-284
5. Control valve assembly AT-294
6. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Con-
AT-319
G
dition Check" .)
7. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid
With selector lever AT-334
Condition Check" .) H
in D position, driv-
ing is not possible. 8. 1st one-way clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid
AT-344
Condition Check" .)
9. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condi- I
OFF vehicle AT-311
tion Check" .)
10. Reverse brake (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Con-
AT-319
dition Check" .)
J
11. Forward one-way clutch* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50,
AT-319
"Fluid Condition Check" .)
12. Forward brake* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Con- K
AT-319
dition Check" .)
1. Fluid level and state AT-50
2. Line pressure test AT-51 L
ON vehicle 3. PNP switch AT-105
4. Control linkage adjustment AT-284
With selector lever M
5. Control valve assembly AT-294
in R position, driv-
ing is not possible. 6. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condi-
AT-311
tion Check" .)
7. Output shaft (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition
OFF vehicle AT-319
Check" .)
8. Reverse brake (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condi-
AT-319
tion Check" .)
Can not be 1. Manual mode switch AT-217
changed to manual
2. Turbine revolution sensor AT-152
mode.
Refer to AT-272, ON vehicle
"Cannot Be
3. CAN communication line AT-98
Changed to Manual
Mode" .

Revision; 2004 April AT-81 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference page

Engine does not 1. Ignition switch and starter PG-4, SC-10
start in “N” or “P”
2. Control linkage adjustment AT-284
position.
Refer to AT-243, ON vehicle
"Engine Cannot Be
3. PNP switch AT-105
Started In “P” or “N”
Position" .
1. Ignition switch and starter PG-4, SC-10
Engine starts in
positions other than ON vehicle 2. Control linkage adjustment AT-284
“N” or “P”.
3. PNP switch AT-105
1. Fluid level and state AT-50
2. Engine speed signal AT-115
3. Turbine revolution sensor AT-152
ON vehicle
4. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-117
Engine stall.
5. CAN communication line AT-98
6. Control valve assembly AT-294
7. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Con-
OFF vehicle AT-319
dition Check" .)
1. Fluid level and state AT-50
2. Engine speed signal AT-115
3. Turbine revolution sensor AT-152
Engine stalls when ON vehicle
selector lever 4. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-117
shifted “N” → “D”,
5. CAN communication line AT-98
“R”.
6. Control valve assembly AT-294
7. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Con-
OFF vehicle AT-319
dition Check" .)
1. Fluid level and state AT-50
2. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve AT-229, AT-189
3. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve AT-221, AT-179
Engine speed does ON vehicle 4. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-144
not return to idle.
5. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-110, AT-157
Refer to AT-271,
"Engine Speed 6. CAN communication line AT-98
Does Not Return To
7. Control valve assembly AT-294
Idle" .
8. Front brake [brake band (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50,
AT-319
"Fluid Condition Check" .)]
OFF vehicle
9. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition
AT-350
Check" .)
*: Parts behind Drum Support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-15, "Cross-Sectional View" .

Revision; 2004 April AT-82 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values ACS002BJ

TCM TERMINAL CONNECTOR LAYOUT A

AT

D
SCIA0495E

TCM INSPECTION TABLE

Data are reference value. Measured between each terminals 5, 14, 24 and 46 (TCM ground). E
Terminal Wire
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color
After warming up the engine, release your foot from the
2V
F
Line pressure accelerator pedal.
1 B/R
solenoid valve After warming up the engine, press the accelerator pedal
0.7V
all the way down. G

– Battery voltage
H
2 W Power supply
Measure 3 seconds after switching “OFF” the ignition
0V
switch.
I

– Battery voltage
3 W Power supply J

Measure 3 seconds after switching “OFF” the ignition

0V
switch.
K
SEL3 (pressure
4 P/L – – –
switch 3)
5 B Ground – – – L
6 L CAN H – – –
7 R CAN L – – –
M
When ATF temperature 0°C (32°F) 2.2V
Fluid temperature
8 B/OR When ATF temperature 20°C (68°F) 1.8V
sensor 1
When ATF temperature 80°C (176°F) 0.6V
Power supply
9 R/W Always Battery voltage
(Memory back-up)
When the solenoid valve operating (in 1st gear, 2nd gear,
More than 2V
Input clutch sole- or 3rd gear)
10 O/R
noid valve When the solenoid valve is not operating (4th gear or 5th
When 0V
gear)
vehicle
cruises When the solenoid valve operating [6 km/h (4MPH) or
High and low More than 2V
faster in 1st gear or 2nd gear]
11 R/L reverse clutch
solenoid valve When the solenoid valve is not operating [6 km/h
0V
(4MPH)or slower in 1st gear or 3rd, 4th, or 5th gear]

Revision; 2004 April AT-83 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Terminal Wire
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color

– Battery voltage
Power supply
12 Y/R
(out)
– 0V

When the solenoid valve is operating (when running in

When Battery voltage
Low coast brake M1-1 gear or M2-2 gear)
13 W/L vehicle
solenoid valve When the solenoid valve is not operating (when running
cruises 0V
in “D”)
14 B Ground – – –
15 B/W SEL4 – – –
SEL1 (pressure
16 W/G – – –
switch 2)
When ATF temperature about 0°C (32°F) 2.2V
Fluid temperature
17 G/R When ATF temperature about 20°C (68°F) 1.7V
sensor 2
When ATF temperature about 80°C (176°F) 0.45V
When the solenoid valve is operating (other than 4th
Front brake sole- More than 2V
19 R/B gear)
noid valve
When the solenoid valve is not operating (4th gear) 0V

TCC solenoid When When lock-up More than 2V

20 Y
valve vehicle When not lock-up 0V
cruises
When the solenoid valve is operating (1st gear or 5th
More than 2V
Direct clutch sole- gear)
21 G
noid valve When the solenoid valve is not operating (2nd gear, 3rd
0V
gear, or 4th gear)
SEL2 (pressure
22 P/B – – –
switch 5)
K-line (CONSULT-
23 LG The terminal is connected to the data link connector for CONSULT-II.
II signal)
24 B Ground – – –

PSC2 (pressure When high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve “ON”. 0V
26 G/Y
switch 6) When high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve “OFF”. Battery voltage
When When moving at 20 km/h (12MPH), use the CONSULT-II
vehicle pulse frequency measuring function.
Vehicle speed
cruises
27 Y/B sensor A/T (revo- CAUTION: 185 (Hz)
lution sensor) Connect the data link connector to the vehicle-side
diagnosis connector.
Selector lever in “P” position. Battery voltage
30 R/W PNP switch 1
Selector lever in “N” position. Less than 2.5V
Selector lever in “P” position. Battery voltage
31 OR PNP switch 2
Selector lever in “D” position. Less than 2.5V

– Battery voltage

33 Y/R Power supply

– 0V

Revision; 2004 April AT-84 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Terminal Wire
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color A
PSB2 (pressure When front brake solenoid valve “OFF”. Battery voltage
35 B/Y
switch 1) When front brake solenoid valve“ ON”. 0V
B
When When running at 50 km/h (31MPH) in 4th gear with the
vehicle closed throttle position signal “OFF”, use the CONSULT-II
Turbine revolution cruises pulse frequency measuring function.
36 L/Y 1.3 (kHz)
sensor 1 CAUTION: AT
Connect the data link connector to the vehicle-side
diagnosis connector.
Selector lever in “D” position. Battery voltage D
38 SB PNP switch 3
Selector lever in “R” position. Less than 2.5V
Selector lever in “D” position. Less than 2.5V
39 BR PNP switch 4 E
Selector lever in “P” position. Battery voltage
40 Y/G DATA BIT1 – – –
Selector lever in “R” position. 0V F
Back-up lamp
41 R
relay Selector lever in other positions. Battery voltage

G
– Battery voltage

42 Y/R Power supply

H
– 0V

When moving at 20 km/h (12MPH) in 1st gear with the I

closed throttle position signal “OFF”, use the CONSULT-II
When pulse frequency measuring function.
Turbine revolution
45 PU vehicle 1.3 (kHz)
sensor 2 CAUTION:
cruises J
Connect the data link connector to the vehicle-side
diagnosis connector.
46 B Ground – – –
K
PNP switch 3 Selector lever in “D” position. Battery voltage
47 G/W
(monitor) Selector lever in “R” position. Less than 2.5V
Selector lever in “N” and “ P” positions. Battery voltage L
48 GY/R Starter relay
Selector lever in other positions. 0V

Revision; 2004 April AT-85 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

CONSULT-II ACS002BK

After performing “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH CONSULT-II)” (Refer to AT-86 ), place check
marks for results on the AT-45, "DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET" . Reference pages are provided following the
items.
NOTICE:
1. The CONSULT-II electrically displays shift timing and lock-up timing (that is, operation timing of each sole-
noid).
Check for time difference between actual shift timing and the CONSULT-II display. If the difference is
noticeable, mechanical parts (except solenoids, sensors, etc.) may be malfunctioning. Check mechanical
parts using applicable diagnostic procedures.
2. Shift schedule (which implies gear position) displayed on CONSULT-II and that indicated in Service Man-
ual may differ slightly. This occurs because of the following reasons:
– Actual shift schedule has more or less tolerance or allowance,
– Shift schedule indicated in Service Manual refers to the point where shifts start, and
– Gear position displayed on CONSULT-II indicates the point where shifts are completed.
3. Display of solenoid valves on CONSULT-II changes at the start of shifting, while gear position is displayed
upon completion of shifting (which is computed by TCM).
4. Additional CONSULT-II information can be found in the Operation Manual supplied with the CONSULT-II
unit.
FUNCTION
Diagnostic test mode Function Reference page
Self-diagnostic results Self-diagnostic results can be read and erased quickly. AT-87
Data monitor Input/Output data in the ECM can be read. AT-90
CAN diagnostic support
The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. —
monitor
Performed by CONSULT-II instead of a technician to determine whether each system is
Function test —
“OK” or “NG”.
DTC work support Select the operating condition to confirm Diagnosis Trouble Codes. AT-93
ECU (TCM) part number ECU (TCM) part number can be read. —

CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE

Item name Condition Display value (Approx.)
ATF TEMP SE 1 2.2 - 1.8 - 0.6 V
0°C (32° F) - 20°C (68°F) - 80°C (176°F)
ATF TEMP SE 2 2.2 - 1.7 - 0.45 V
When perform slip lock-up 0.2 - 0.4 A
TCC SOLENOID
When perform lock-up 0.4 - 0.6 A

SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH CONSULT-II)

CONSULT-II Setting Procedure
● For details, refer to the separate “CONSULT-II Operations Man-
ual”.
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data
link connector, which is located in instrument lower panel on
driver side.

PHIA0096E

Revision; 2004 April AT-86 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

3. Turn ignition switch “ON” (Do not start engine).

4. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. A

AT

SAIA0450E

D
5. Touch “ENGINE” for OBD-II detected items or touch “A/T” for
TCM self-diagnosis.
If “A/T” or “ENGINE” is not indicated, go to GI-39, "CONSULT-II
E
Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" .

G
SAT014K

6. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. H

Display shows malfunction experienced since the last erasing
operation.
CONSULT-II performs REAL-TIME SELF-DIAGNOSIS.
Also, any malfunction detected while in this mode will be dis- I
played at real time.

SAT987J
K

Self-Diagnostic Result Test Mode

X: Applicable, —: Not applicable
L
TCM self-diagnosis OBD-II (DTC)
MIL indicator
Items (CONSULT- A/T CHECK lamp*1,
Malfunction is detected when... “A/T” with M
II screen terms) indicator “ENGINE” with
CONSULT-II
lamp CONSULT-II or
GST
CAN COMM CIR-
● When a malfunction is detected in CAN communications X U1000 U1000
CUIT
● If this signal is ON other than in P or N position, this is
STARTER RELAY/ judged to be a malfunction.
X P0615 —
CIRC (And if it is OFF in P or N position, this too is judged to be a
malfunction.)
● PNP switch 1-4 signals input with impossible pattern
● PNP switch 3 monitor terminal cut line
PNP SW/CIRC X P0705 P0705
● P position is detected from N position without any other
position being detected in between.

Revision; 2004 April AT-87 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

TCM self-diagnosis OBD-II (DTC)

MIL indicator
Items (CONSULT- A/T CHECK lamp*1,
Malfunction is detected when... “A/T” with
II screen terms) indicator “ENGINE” with
CONSULT-II
lamp CONSULT-II or
GST
● Signal from vehicle speed sensor A/T (Revolution sensor)
not input due to cut line or the like
VEH SPD SEN/
● Unexpected signal input during running
CIR AT (Revolution X P0720 P0720
sensor) ● After ignition switch is turned ON, unexpected signal input
from vehicle speed sensor MTR before the vehicle starts
moving
ENGINE SPEED ● TCM does not receive the CAN communication signal from
X P0725 —
SIG the ECM.
TCC SOLENOID/ ● Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to cut line,
X P0740 P0740
CIRC short, or the like
● A/T cannot perform lock-up even if electrical circuit is good.
A/T TCC S/V
● TCM detects as irregular by comparing difference value X P0744 P0744*2
FNCTN
with slip rotation.
● Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to cut line,
L/PRESS SOL/ short, or the like
X P0745 P0745
CIRC ● TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with
monitor value.
● When the power supply to the TCM is cut “OFF”, for exam-
ple because the battery is removed, and the self-diagnos-
TCM-POWER tics memory function stops
— P1701 —
SUPPLY ● This is not a malfunction message (Whenever shutting
“OFF” a power supply to the TCM, this message appears
on the screen.)
TCM·RAM ● TCM memory (RAM) is malfunctioning. — P1702 —
TCM·ROM ● TCM memory (ROM) is malfunctioning. — P1703 —
TCM·EEPROM ● TCM memory (EEP ROM) is malfunctioning. — P1704 —
● TCM does not receive the proper accelerator pedal position
TP SEN/CIRC A/T X P1705 P1705
signals (input by CAN communication) from ECM.
ATF TEMP SEN/ ● During running, the ATF temperature sensor signal voltage
X P1710 P0710
CIRC is excessively high or low
● TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the
TURBINE REV S/ sensor.
X P1716 P1716
CIRC ● TCM detects an irregularity only at position of 4th gear for
turbine revolution sensor 2.
● Signal (CAN communication) from vehicle speed sensor
VEH SPD SE/ MTR not input due to cut line or the like — P1721 —
CIR·MTR
● Unexpected signal input during running
● Except during shift change, the gear position and ATF pres-
A/T INTERLOCK sure switch states are monitored and comparative judge- X P1730 P1730
ment made.
● Each ATF pressure switch and solenoid current is moni-
A/T 1ST E/BRAK- tored and if a pattern is detected having engine braking 1st
X P1731 —
ING gear other than in the M1 position, a malfunction is
detected.
● Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to functional
I/C SOLENOID/ malfunction, cut line, short, or the like
X P1752 P1752
CIRC ● TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with
monitor value.

Revision; 2004 April AT-88 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

TCM self-diagnosis OBD-II (DTC)

A
MIL indicator
Items (CONSULT- A/T CHECK lamp*1,
Malfunction is detected when... “A/T” with
II screen terms) indicator “ENGINE” with
CONSULT-II
lamp CONSULT-II or B
GST
● TCM detects that actual gear ratio is irregular, and relation
between gear position and condition of ATF pressure
AT
switch 3 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal.
I/C SOLENOID (Other than during shift change) X P1754 P1754*2
FNCTN
● TCM detects that relation between gear position and condi-
tion of ATF pressure switch 3 is irregular during releasing D
accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
● Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to functional
FR/B SOLENOID/ malfunction, cut line, short, or the like E
X P1757 P1757
CIRC ● TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with
monitor value.
● TCM detects that actual gear ratio is irregular, and relation F
between gear position and condition of ATF pressure
switch 1 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal.
FR/B SOLENOID (Other than during shift change) X P1759 P1759*2
FNCT G
● TCM detects that relation between gear position and condi-
tion of ATF pressure switch 1 is irregular during releasing
accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
H
● Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to cut line,
D/C SOLENOID/ short, or the like
X P1762 P1762
CIRC ● TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with
monitor value. I
● TCM detects that actual gear ratio is irregular, and relation
between gear position and condition of ATF pressure
switch 5 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. J
D/C SOLENOID (Other than during shift change) X P1764 P1764*2
FNCTN
● TCM detects that relation between gear position and condi-
tion of ATF pressure switch 5 is irregular during releasing K
accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
● Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to functional
malfunction, cut line, short, or the like
HLR/C SOL/CIRC X P1767 P1767 L
● TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with
monitor value.
● TCM detects that actual gear ratio is irregular, and relation
M
between gear position and condition of ATF pressure
switch 6 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal.
HLR/C SOL (Other than during shift change) X P1769 P1769*2
FNCTN
● TCM detects that relation between gear position and condi-
tion of ATF pressure switch 6 is irregular during releasing
accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
LC/B SOLENOID/ ● Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to functional
X P1772 P1772
CIRC malfunction, cut line, short, or the like
● TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to oper-
ate the solenoid valve.
LC/B SOLENOID
● Condition of ATF pressure switch 2 is different from monitor X P1774 P1774*2
FNCT
value, and relation between gear position and actual gear
ratio is irregular.
MANU MODE SW/ ● When an impossible pattern of switch signals is detected, a
— P1815 —
CIRC malfunction is detected.

Revision; 2004 April AT-89 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

TCM self-diagnosis OBD-II (DTC)

MIL indicator
Items (CONSULT- A/T CHECK lamp*1,
Malfunction is detected when... “A/T” with
II screen terms) indicator “ENGINE” with
CONSULT-II
lamp CONSULT-II or
GST
● TCM detects that actual gear ratio is normal, and relation
ATF PRES SW 1/ between gear position and condition of ATF pressure
— P1841 —
CIRC switch 1 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal.
(Other than during shift change)
● TCM detects that actual gear ratio is normal, and relation
ATF PRES SW 3/ between gear position and condition of ATF pressure
— P1843 —
CIRC switch 3 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal.
(Other than during shift change)
● TCM detects that actual gear ratio is normal, and relation
ATF PRES SW 5/ between gear position and condition of ATF pressure
— P1845 —
CIRC switch 5 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal.
(Other than during shift change)
● TCM detects that actual gear ratio is normal, and relation
ATF PRES SW 6/ between gear position and condition of ATF pressure
— P1846 —
CIRC switch 6 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal.
(Other than during shift change)
NO DTC IS
DETECTED FUR-
THER TESTING ● No NG item has been detected. — X X
MAY BE
REQUIRED
*1: Refer to AT-40, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)" .
*2: These malfunctions cannot be displayed MIL if another malfunction is assigned to MIL.

Data Monitor Mode (A/T)

X: Standard, —: Not applicable
Monitor Item Selection

Monitored item (Unit) SELEC- Remarks

ECU INPUT MAIN SIG-
TION FROM
SIGNALS NALS
MENU
VHCL/S SE·A/T (km/h) X X X Revolution sensor
VHCL/S SE·MTR (km/h) X — X
ACCELE POSI (0.0/8) X — X Accelerator pedal position signal
Degree of opening for accelerator rec-
ognized by the TCM
THROTTLE POSI (0.0/8) X X X
For fail-safe operation, the specific
value used for control is displayed.
BATTERY BOLT (V) X — X
ENGINE SPEED (rpm) X X X
TURBINE REV (rpm) X — X
ATF TEMP 1 (°C) — X X
ATF TEMP 2 (°C) — X X
OUTPUT REV (rpm) X X X
ATF TEMP SE 1 (V) X — X
ATF TEMP SE 2 (V) X — X
ATF PRES SW 1 (ON-OFF display) X X X (for FR/B solenoid)
ATF PRES SW 2 (ON-OFF display) X X X (for LC/B solenoid)
ATF PRES SW 3 (ON-OFF display) X X X (for I/C solenoid)

Revision; 2004 April AT-90 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Monitor Item Selection

A
Monitored item (Unit) SELEC- Remarks
ECU INPUT MAIN SIG-
TION FROM
SIGNALS NALS
MENU
ATF PRES SW 5 (ON-OFF display) X X X (for D/C solenoid) B
ATF PRES SW 6 (ON-OFF display) X X X (for HLR/C solenoid)
PNP SW 1 (ON-OFF display) X — X
AT
PNP SW 2 (ON-OFF display) X — X
PNP SW 3 (ON-OFF display) X — X
PNP SW 4 (ON-OFF display) X — X D
1 POSITION SW (ON-OFF display) X — X
ASCD·CRUISE (ON-OFF display) X — X
E
ASCD·OD CUT (ON-OFF display) X — X Not mounted but displayed.
OD CONT SW (ON-OFF display) X — X
MANU MODE SW (ON-OFF display) X — X F
NON M-MODE SW (ON-OFF display) X — X
UP SW LEVER (ON-OFF display) X — X
DOWN SW LEVER (ON-OFF display) X — X
G

POWER SHIFT SW (ON-OFF display) X — X Not mounted but displayed.

CLSO THL POS (ON-OFF display) X — X Signal input with CAN communications H
W/O THL POS (ON-OFF display) X — X Signal input with CAN communications
TCC SOLENOID (A) — X X
LINE PRES SOL (A) — X X I
I/C SOLENOID (A) — X X
FR/B SOLENOID (A) — X X
J
D/C SOLENOID (A) — X X
HLR/C SOL (A) — X X
HOLD SW (ON-OFF display) X — X Not mounted but displayed. K
BRAKE SW (ON-OFF display) X — X Stop lamp switch
Gear position recognized by the TCM
GEAR — X X L
updated after gear-shifting
GEAR RATIO — X X
Selector lever position is recognized by
the TCM.
M
SLCTLVR POSI — X X
For fail safe operation, the specific
value used for control is displayed.
VEHICLE SPEED (km/h) — X X Vehicle speed recognized by the TCM.
Difference between engine speed and
TC SLIP SPEED (rpm) — X X
torque converter input shaft speed
Displays the value measured by the
Voltage (V) — — X
voltage probe.
F SUN GW REV (rpm) — — X
F CARR GR REV (rpm) — — X
SFT UP ST SW — — X
Not mounted but displayed.
SFT DWN ST SW — — X
ABS SIGNAL — — X
ACC OD CUT — — X
ACC SIGNAL — — X

Revision; 2004 April AT-91 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Monitor Item Selection

Monitored item (Unit) SELEC- Remarks

ECU INPUT MAIN SIG-
TION FROM
SIGNALS NALS
MENU
TCS GR/P KEEP — — X
TCS SIGNAL 2 — — X
TCS SIGNAL 1 — — X
ON OFF SOL (ON-OFF display) — — X LC/B solenoid
TCC SOL MON — — X
L/P SOL MON — — X
I/C SL MON — — X
FR/B SOL MON — — X
D/C SOL MON — — X
HLR/C SOL MON — — X
ONOFF SOL MON — — X LC/B solenoid
P POSI IND — — X
R POSI IND — — X
N POSI IND — — X
D POSI IND — — X
4TH POSI IND — — X
3RD POSI IND — — X
2ND POSI IND — — X
1ST POSI IND — — X
M MODE IND — — X
POWER M LAMP — — X
F-SAFE IND/L — — X
ATF WARN LAMP — — X
BACK-UP LAMP — — X
STARTER RELAY — — X
PNP SW3 MON (ON-OFF display) — — X
C/VCLBID 1 — — X
C/VCLBID 2 — — X
C/VCLBID 3 — — X
UNIT CLB ID 1 — — X
UNIT CLB ID 2 — — X
UNIT CLB ID 3 — — X
TRGT GR RATIO — — X
TRG PRE TCC — — X
TRG PRE L/P — — X
TRG PRE I/C — — X
TRG PRE FR/B — — X
TRG PRE D/C — — X
TRG PRE HLR/C — — X
DRV CST JUDGE — — X
START RLY MON — — X
Next gear — — X

Revision; 2004 April AT-92 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Monitor Item Selection

A
Monitored item (Unit) SELEC- Remarks
ECU INPUT MAIN SIG-
TION FROM
SIGNALS NALS
MENU
SHIFT MODE — — X B
MANU GR POSI — — X
Frequency (Hz) — — X
AT
DUTY·HI (high) (%) — — X
The value measured by the pulse probe
DUTY·LOW (low) (%) — — X
is displayed.
PLS WIDTH·HI (ms) — — X D
PLS WIDTH·LOW (ms) — — X

DTC WORK SUPPORT MODE WITH CONSULT-II E

CONSULT-II Setting Procedure
● For details, refer to the separate “CONSULT-II Operation Man-
ual”. F
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data
link connector, which is located in instrument lower panel on G
driver side.

PHIA0096E

I
3. Turn ignition switch “ON” (Do not start engine).
4. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
J

L
SAIA0450E

5. Touch “A/T”.
If “A/T” is not indicated, go to GI-39, "CONSULT-II Data Link M
Connector (DLC) Circuit" .

SAT014K

Revision; 2004 April AT-93 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

6. Touch “DTC WORK SUPPORT”.

SCIA5304E

7. Touch select item menu.

SCIA0512E

8. Touch “START”.

SCIA5159E

9. Perform driving test according to “DTC CONFIRMATION PRO-

CEDURE” in “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”.

SCIA5160E

● When testing conditions are satisfied, CONSULT-II screen

changes from “OUT OF CONDITION” to “TESTING”.

SCIA5161E

Revision; 2004 April AT-94 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

10. Stop vehicle. If “NG” appears on the screen, malfunction may

exist. Go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”. A
11. Perform test drive to check gear shift feeling in accordance with
instructions displayed.
12. Touch “YES” or “NO”. B
13. CONSULT-II procedure is ended.

AT

SCIA5164E
D
If “NG” appears on the screen, a malfunction may exist. Go to
“DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.
E

G
SCIA5163E

K
SCIA5162E

Revision; 2004 April AT-95 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

DTC WORK SUPPORT MODE

DTC work support item Description Check item
I/C SOL FUNCTN CHECK* — —
FR/B SOL FUNCTN CHECK* — —
D/C SOL FUNCTN CHECK* — —
HLR/C SOL FUNCTN CHECK* — —
LC/B SOL FUNCTN CHECK* — —
Following items for “TCC solenoid function (lock-up) ” can be con-
firmed.
● TCC solenoid valve
TCC SOL FUNCTN CHECK ● Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being conducted
or not) ● Hydraulic control circuit

● Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG)

*: Do not use, but displayed.

Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT-II ACS002BL

OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH GST)

Refer to EC-119, "Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function" .
OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)
Refer to EC-66, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)" .
TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)
Description
In the unlikely event of a malfunction in the electrical system, when the ignition switch is switched “ON”,
the A/T CHECK indicator lamp lights up for 2 seconds, then flashes for 8 seconds. If there is no malfunction,
when the ignition switch is turned “ON”, the indicator lamp lights up for 2 seconds. As a method for locating the
suspect circuit, when the self-diagnostics start signal is input, the memory for the malfunction location is output
and the A/T CHECK indicator lamp flashes to display the corresponding DTC.
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK A/T CHECK INDICATOR LAMP
1. Start the engine with selector lever in “P” position. Warm engine to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON” and “OFF” at least twice, then leave it in the “OFF” position.
3. Wait 10 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.
(Do not start engine.)
5. Does A/T CHECK indicator lamp come on for about 2 seconds?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO AT-241, "A/T CHECK Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On" .

Revision; 2004 April AT-96 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

2. JUDGEMENT PROCEDURE STEP 1 A

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Push shift lock release button.
3. Move selector lever from “P” to “D” position. B
4. Release accelerator pedal. (Set the closed throttle position signal “ON”.)
5. Depress brake pedal. (Brake switch signal “ON”.)
AT
6. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
7. Wait 3 seconds.
8. Move the selector lever to the Manual shift gate side. (Manual mode switch “ON”.) D
9. Release brake pedal. (Brake switch signal “OFF”.)
10. Move the selector lever to “D” position. (Manual mode switch “OFF”.)
11. Depress brake pedal. (Brake switch signal “ON”.) E
12. Release brake pedal. (Brake switch signal “OFF”.)
13. Depress accelerator pedal fully and release it.
F
>> GO TO 3.

3. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE G

Check A/T CHECK indicator lamp.

Refer to AT-97, "Judgement Self-Diagnosis Code" . H
If the system does not go into self-diagnostics. Refer to AT-237, "PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION, MANUAL
MODE, BRAKE AND THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT" .

I
>> DIAGNOSIS END
Judgement Self-Diagnosis Code
If there is a malfunction, the lamp lights up for the time corresponding to the suspect circuit. J

SCIA4758E

Erase Self-Diagnosis
● In order to make it easier to find the cause of hard-to-duplicate malfunctions, malfunction information is
stored into the control unit as necessary during use by the user. This memory is not erased no matter how
many times the ignition switch is turned ON and OFF.
● However, this information is erased by turning ignition switch “OFF” after executing self-diagnostics or by
erasing the memory using the CONSULT-II.

Revision; 2004 April AT-97 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE

DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE PFP:23710

Description ACS002BM

CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent malfunction detection ability.
Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links
with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are con-
nected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission
with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002BN

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “CAN COMM CIRCUIT” with CONSULT-II or U1000 without CONSULT-II is
detected when TCM cannot communicate to other control units.
Possible Cause ACS002BO

Harness or connectors
(CAN communication line is open or shorted.)
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002BP

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and wait for at least 6 seconds.
4. If DTC is detected, go to AT-100, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SAT014K

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”.

Revision; 2004 April AT-98 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE

Wiring Diagram — AT — CAN ACS002BQ

AT

TCWT0054E

Revision; 2004 April AT-99 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE

TCM terminal and Data are reference value.

Terminal Wire
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color
6 L CAN H – –
7 R CAN L – –

Diagnostic Procedure ACS002BR

1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and start engine.
2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-
II.
Is any malfunction of the “CAN COMM CIRCUIT” indicated?
YES >> Print out CONSULT-II screen, GO TO LAN section.
Refer to LAN-4, "CAN Communication Unit" .
NO >> INSPECTION END

PCIA0061E

Revision; 2004 April AT-100 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P0615 START SIGNAL CIRCUIT

DTC P0615 START SIGNAL CIRCUIT PFP:25230

A
Description ACS002BS

Prohibits cranking other at “P” or “N” position.

B
On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002BT

● This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “STARTER RELAY/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or 14th judgement flicker without AT
CONSULT-II is detected when detects as irregular when switched “ON” other than at “P” or “N” position.
(Or when switched “OFF” at “P” or “N” position).
Possible Cause ACS002BU D
● Harness or connectors
(The starter relay and TCM circuit is open or shorted.)
● Starter relay circuit E

DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002BV

NOTE: F
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. G
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. H
3. Start engine.
4. Vehicle start for at least 2 consecutive seconds.
I
5. If DTC is detected, go to AT-103, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SAT014K

Revision; 2004 April AT-101 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P0615 START SIGNAL CIRCUIT

Wiring Diagram — AT — STSIG ACS002BW

TCWT0099E

Revision; 2004 April AT-102 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P0615 START SIGNAL CIRCUIT

TCM terminal and Data are reference value. Measured between each terminals 5, 14, 24 and 46 (TCM ground).
Terminal Wire A
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color
Selector lever in “N” and “P” positions. Battery voltage
48 GY/R Starter relay IGN ON
Selector lever in other positions. 0V B

Diagnostic Procedure ACS002IL

1. CHECK STARTER RELAY (WITH CONSULT-II) AT

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) D
2. Select “SELECTION FROM MENU” in “DATA MONITOR” mode
for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and check monitor “STARTER
RELAY” ON/OFF.
E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
F

PCIA0056E
G
2. CHECK STARTER RELAY (WITHOUT CONSULT-II)
Without CONSULT-II H
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Check the voltage between the TCM connector and ground.
I
Connector
Item Terminal No. Shift position Voltage (Approx.)
No.
“N” and “P” Battery voltage J
Starter relay F104 48 Ground
“R” and “D” 0V

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. K
NG >> GO TO 3. PCIA0060E

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM L

Check the following items:

● Starter relay, Refer to SC-10, "STARTING SYSTEM" . M
● Disconnections or short-circuits in the harness between TCM and the IPDM E/R
● Disconnections or short-circuits in the harness between TCM and the combination meter
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

4. CHECK DTC
Perform "DTC confirmation Procedure". Refer to AT-101, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 5.

Revision; 2004 April AT-103 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P0615 START SIGNAL CIRCUIT

5. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision; 2004 April AT-104 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH

DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH PFP:32006

A
Description ACS002BY

● The park/neutral position (PNP) switch includes a transmission position switch.

● The transmission range switch detects the selector lever position and sends a signal to the TCM. B

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002BZ

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. AT

● Diagnostic trouble code “PNP SW/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or P0705 without CONSULT-II is detected
under the following conditions.
– When TCM does not receive the correct voltage signal from the PNP switch 1, 2, 3, 4 based on the gear D
position.
– When monitor terminal of PNP switch 3 is disconnected.
– When no other position but “P” position is detected from “N” positions. E
Possible Cause ACS002C0

● Harness or connectors F
[The park/neutral position (PNP) switch 1, 2, 3, 4 and TCM circuit is open or shorted.]
● Park/neutral position (PNP) switch 1, 2, 3, 4
● Park/neutral position (PNP) switch 3 monitor terminal disconnected G
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002C1

CAUTION: H
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. I
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
J
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine. K
4. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 2
consecutive seconds.
THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.2V L
5. If DTC is detected, go to AT-107, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

M
SAT014K

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”.

Revision; 2004 April AT-105 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH

Wiring Diagram — AT — PNP/SW ACS002C2

TCWT0100E

Revision; 2004 April AT-106 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH

TCM terminals and Data are reference value. Measured between each terminals 5, 14, 24 and 46 (TCM ground).
Terminal No. Wire color Item Condition Data (Approx.) A
Selector lever in “P” position. Battery voltage
30 R/W PNP switch 1
Selector lever in “N” position. Less than 2.5V
B
Selector lever in “P” position. Battery voltage
31 OR PNP switch 2
Selector lever in “D” position. Less than 2.5V
Selector lever in “D” position. Battery voltage AT
38 SB PNP switch 3 IGN ON
Selector lever in “R” position. Less than 2.5V
Selector lever in “D” position. Less than 2.5V
39 BR PNP switch 4
Selector lever in “P” position. Battery voltage D

PNP switch 3 Selector lever in “D” position. Battery voltage

47 G/W
(monitor) Selector lever in “R” position. Less than 2.5V
E
Diagnostic Procedure ACS002IM

1. CHECK PNP SW CIRCUIT (WITH CONSULT-II) F

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” G
with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out “N·P”, “R” and “D” position switches moving selector
lever to each position. H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 3. I

PCIA0034E
J
2. CHECK PNP SW CIRCUIT (WITHOUT CONSULT-II)
Without CONSULT-II K
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Selector lever to “P“, “R”, “N”, or “D” position to check the volt-
age between the TCM connector terminals and ground. L

Connector No. F104

Shift Terminal No. M
position
30(RW) - 31(OR) - 38(SB) - 39(BR) -
Ground Ground Ground Ground
P Battery voltage Battery voltage – Battery voltage
R – – Less than 2.5V – PCIA0035E

N Less than 2.5V – – –

D – Less than 2.5V Battery voltage Less than 2.5V

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 3.

Revision; 2004 April AT-107 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

Check the following items.
● Disconnection or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and A/T unit harness connector.
● PNP switch. Refer to AT-109, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

4. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and control valve assembly harness connector.
Terminal No.
Item Connector No. Continuity
(Wire color)
A/T unit assembly har-
F8
ness connector
1 (G/B) Yes
Control valve assembly
F302
harness connector
A/T unit assembly har-
F8
ness connector SCIA3063E
2 (G/W) Yes
Control valve assembly
F302
harness connector
A/T unit assembly har-
F8
ness connector
3 (G/R) Yes
Control valve assembly
F302
harness connector
A/T unit assembly har-
F8
ness connector
4 (Y/R) Yes
Control valve assembly
F302
harness connector
A/T unit assembly har-
F8
ness connector
5 (L/Y) Yes
Control valve assembly
F302
harness connector
4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Reinstall any part removed.
OK or NG
OK >> Replace control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-105, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 6.

Revision; 2004 April AT-108 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH

6. CHECK TCM A
1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG B
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
AT
Component Inspection ACS004K3

PNP SWITCH
1. Selector lever to various positions to check the continuity D
between terminals on the PNP switch and ground.
Terminal No.
PNP SW Shift position Connector No. Continuity
(Wire color) E
SW 1 1 (G/W) - Ground
P
SW 2 2 (W/L) - Ground No
SW 3 F302 3 (W/Y) - Ground F
D
SW 4 4 (GY) - Ground
Yes
SW 3 Monitor P, R, N, D 3 (W/Y) - 5 (W/R) SCIA3062E
G

2. If NG, check the continuity with the control linkage disconnected. (Refer to Step 1 above.)
3. If OK with the control linkage disconnected, adjust the control linkage. Refer to AT-284, "Adjustment of A/ H
T Position" .
4. If NG even when the control linkage is disconnected, replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294,
"Control Valve Assembly" .
I

Revision; 2004 April AT-109 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)

DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) PFP:32702

Description ACS002C5

The revolution sensor detects the revolution of the idler gear parking pawl lock gear and emits a pulse signal.
The pulse signal is sent to the TCM which converts it into vehicle speed.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002C6

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT” with CONSULT-II or P0720 without CONSULT-II is
detected under the following conditions.
– When TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor.
– After ignition switch is turned “ON”, irregular signal input from vehicle speed sensor MTR before the vehi-
cle starts moving.
Possible Cause ACS002C7

● Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
● Revolution sensor
● Vehicle speed sensor MTR
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002C8

CAUTION:
● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
● Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Drive vehicle and check for an increase of “VHCL/S SE·A/T”
value in response to “VHCL/S SE·MTR” value.
If the check result is NG, go to AT-112, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If the check result is OK, go to following step.
4. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II.
5. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 5
consecutive seconds.
VHCL SPEED SE: 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more SAT014K
THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.0/8
Selector lever: “D” position
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving
conditions required for this test.
If the check result is NG, go to AT-112, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If the check result is OK, go to following step.
6. Maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds.
ENGINE SPEED: 3,500 rpm or more
THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.0/8
Selector lever: “D” position
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving
conditions required for this test.
If the check result is NG, go to AT-112, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”.

Revision; 2004 April AT-110 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)

Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSA/T ACS002C9

AT

TCWT0101E

Revision; 2004 April AT-111 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)

TCM terminals and Data are reference value. Measured between each terminals 5, 14, 24 and 46 (TCM ground).
Terminal Wire
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color

Power supply IGN ON – Battery voltage

12 Y/R
(out) IGN OFF – 0V
When moving at 20 km/h (12MPH), use the CONSULT-II
Vehicle speed When pulse frequency measuring function.
27 Y/B sensor A/T (revo- vehicle CAUTION: 185 (Hz)
lution sensor) cruises Connect the data link connector to the vehicle-side
diagnosis connector.

Diagnostic Procedure ACS002CA

1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Start the engine.
4. Read out the value of “VHCL/S SE·A/T” while driving.
Check the value changes according to driving speed.
With GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. PCIA0033E

NG >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK REVOLUTION SENSOR (WITH CONSULT-II)

With CONSULT-II
1. Start the engine.
2. Check the pulse when vehicle cruises.
Connector Terminal Data
Condition
No. No. (Approx.)
When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH), use the
CONSULT-II pulse frequency measuring
function. F104 27(Y/B) 185 (Hz)
CAUTION:
Connect the data link connector to the
vehicle-side diagnosis connector.
PCIA0018E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 3.

Revision; 2004 April AT-112 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)

3. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND A/T UNIT ASSEMBLY HARNESS CONNECTOR A
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect TCM connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector B
and TCM connector.
Terminal No.
Item Connector No. Continuity AT
(Wire color)
TCM F103 12 (Y/R)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes
F6 1 (Y/R) D
connector
TCM F104 27 (Y/B)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes E
F6 10 (Y/B)
connector
4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Reinstall any part removed. F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power G
in harness or connectors.

SCIA3339E

I
4. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY
1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector. J
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and control valve assembly harness connector.
K
Terminal No.
Item Connector No. Continuity
(Wire color)
A/T unit assembly har- L
F6 1 (B)
ness connector
Yes
Control valve assem-
F302 8 (B)
bly harness connector
M
A/T unit assembly har-
F6 10 (R/Y)
ness connector SCIA3064E
Yes
Control valve assem-
F302 9 (R/Y)
bly harness connector

4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.

5. Reinstall any part removed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

Revision; 2004 April AT-113 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)

5. DETECT MALFUNCTION ITEMS

1. Check control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check revolution sensor. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

6. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-110, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 7.

7. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision; 2004 April AT-114 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL

DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL PFP:24825

A
Description ACS002CB

The engine speed signal is sent from the ECM to the TCM.
B
On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002CC

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “ENGINE SPEED SIG” with CONSULT-II or P0725 without CONSULT-II is AT
detected when TCM does not receive the ignition signal from ECM during engine cranking or running.
Possible Cause ACS002CD

D
Harness or connectors
(The ECM to the TCM circuit is open or shorted.)
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002CE E
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE: F
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. G
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“A/T” with CONSULT-II. H
2. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 10
consecutive seconds.
VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more I
ACCELE POSI: More than 1/8
Selector lever: “D” position
3. If DTC is detected, go to AT-115, "Diagnostic Procedure" . J

SAT014K

K
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”.
Diagnostic Procedure ACS002CF L
1. CHECK DTC WITH ECM
With CONSULT-II M
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “ENGINE” with CON-
SULT-II. Refer to EC-107, "CONSULT-II Function" .
With GST
Follow the procedure “with CONSULT-II”.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Check the DTC detected item, go to EC-107, "CON-
SULT-II Function" .
● If CAN communication line is detected, go to AT-98, SAT014K

"DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .

Revision; 2004 April AT-115 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL

2. CHECK DTC WITH TCM

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. While monitoring engine speed, check for engine speed change
corresponding to wide-open throttle position signal.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Check the ignition signal circuit.
● Refer to EC-580, "IGNITION SIGNAL"
PCIA0041E

3. CHECK DTC
Perform "DTC confirmation Procedure". Refer to AT-115, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 4.

4. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision; 2004 April AT-116 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE PFP:31940

A
Description ACS002CG

● The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is activated, with the gear in D4 , D5 by the TCM in response
to signals sent from the vehicle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sen- B
sor). Torque converter clutch piston operation will then be controlled.
● Lock-up operation, however, is prohibited when A/T fluid temperature is too low.
● When the accelerator pedal is depressed (less than 1/8) in lock-up condition, the engine speed should not AT
change abruptly. If there is a big jump in engine speed, there is no lock-up.
CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS002CH

D
Item name Condition Display value (Approx.) (A)
When perform slip lock-up 0.2 - 0.4
TCC SOLENOID
When perform lock-up 0.4 - 0.6 E

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002CI

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. F

● Diagnostic trouble code “TCC SOLENOID/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or P0740 without CONSULT-II is
detected under the following conditions.
– When TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. G
– When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value.
Possible Cause ACS002CJ
H
● Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
● Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) I
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002CK

CAUTION: J
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. K
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II L
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 M
consecutive seconds.
VHCL SPEED SE: 80 km/h (50 MPH) or more
ACCELE POS: 0.5/8 - 1.0/8
SELECTOR LEVER: “D” position
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased
engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions
required for this test.
4. If DTC is detected go to AT-119, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SAT014K

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”.

Revision; 2004 April AT-117 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

Wiring Diagram — AT — TCV ACS002CL

TCWT0102E

Revision; 2004 April AT-118 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

TCM terminal and Data are reference value. Measured between each terminals 5, 14, 24 and 46 (TCM ground).
Terminal Wire A
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color
When When lock-up More than 2V
TCC solenoid
20 Y vehicle
valve When not lock-up 0V B
cruises

Diagnostic Procedure ACS002CM

1. CHECK TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT AT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector at the trans- D
mission right side.
3. Check the resistance between terminal and ground.
E
Solenoid valve Connector No. Terminal No. Resistance (Approx.)
Torque converter clutch 8(Y) -
F7 3-9Ω
solenoid valve Ground
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2. SCIA1830E G

2. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY

H
1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
I
and control valve assembly harness connector.
Item Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Continuity
A/T unit assembly J
F7 8 (R/B)
harness connector
Control valve assem- Yes
bly harness connec- F301 11 (R/B) K
tor
4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Reinstall any part removed. SCIA3060E
L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. M

3. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE

Check valve resistance
● Refer to AT-121, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .

Revision; 2004 April AT-119 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

4. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect TCM connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and TCM connector.
Item Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Continuity
TCM F103 20 (Y)
A/T unit assembly Yes
F7 8 (Y)
harness connector

4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. SCIA1831E

5. Reinstall any part removed.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-117, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 6.

6. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision; 2004 April AT-120 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

Component Inspection ACS004K4

TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE A

Resistance check
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . B
3. Disconnect control valve assembly harness connector.
4. Check resistance between terminal and ground.
AT
Terminal No. Resistance (Ω)
Solenoid Valve Connector No.
(Wire color) (Approx.)
Torque converter clutch D
F301 11 (BR) - Ground 3-9Ω
solenoid valve
5. If NG, replace control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control
Valve Assembly" . E

SCIA3061E
F
Operation check
● Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
applying battery voltage to the terminal 11 and ground. G

SCIA3105E

Revision; 2004 April AT-121 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP)

DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP) PFP:31940

Description ACS002CN

This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 5th gear position or the torque converter clutch
does not lock-up as instructed by the TCM. This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or
shorted) but also by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation,
etc.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002CO

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “A/T TCC S/V FNCTN” with CONSULT-II or P0744 without CONSULT-II is
detected under the following conditions.
– When A/T cannot perform lock-up even if electrical circuit is good.
– When TCM detects as irregular by comparing difference value with slip rotation.
Possible Cause ACS002CP

● Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
● Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
● Hydraulic control circuit
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002CQ

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T with CONSULT-II.
2. Select “TCC S/V FNCTN CHECK” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT”
mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and touch “START”.
3. Accelerate vehicle to more than 80 km/h (50 MPH) and maintain
the following condition continuously until “TESTING” has turned
to “COMPLETE”. (It will take approximately 30 seconds after
“TESTING” shows.)
ACCELE POSI: More than 1.0/8 (at all times during step 4)
TCC SOLENOID: 0.4 - 0.6 A
Selector lever: “D” position
[Reference speed: Constant speed of more than 80 km/h (50
MPH)] SAT014K

– Check that “GEAR” shows “5”.

– For shift schedule, refer to AT-371, "Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing Complete
Lock-Up" .
– If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT-II for a long time, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. In
case a 1st trip DTC other than P0744 is shown, refer to applicable “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
DTC”.
4. Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.)
Refer to AT-124, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Refer to shift schedule, AT-371, "Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing Complete Lock-Up" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”.

Revision; 2004 April AT-122 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP)

Wiring Diagram — AT — TCCSIG ACS002CR

AT

TCWT0103E

Revision; 2004 April AT-123 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP)

TCM terminal and Data are reference value. Measured between each terminals 5, 14, 24 and 46 (TCM ground).
Terminal Wire
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color
When When lock-up More than 2V
TCC solenoid
20 Y vehicle
valve When not lock-up 0V
cruises

Diagnostic Procedure ACS002CS

1. CHECK TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector at the trans-
mission right side.
3. Check the resistance between terminal and ground.

Solenoid valve Connector No. Terminal No. Resistance (Approx.)

Torque converter clutch 8(Y) -
F7 3-9Ω
solenoid valve Ground
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2. SCIA1830E

2. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and control valve assembly harness connector.
Item Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Continuity
A/T unit assembly
F7 8 (R/B)
harness connector
Control valve assem- Yes
bly harness connec- F301 11 (R/B)
tor
4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Reinstall any part removed. SCIA3060E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

3. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE

Check valve resistance
● Refer to AT-126, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .

Revision; 2004 April AT-124 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP)

4. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT A

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect TCM connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector B
and TCM connector.
Item Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Continuity
AT
TCM F103 20 (Y)
A/T unit assembly Yes
F7 8 (Y)
harness connector D
4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. SCIA1831E

5. Reinstall any part removed.

OK or NG E
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
F
5. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-122, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
G
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 6.
H
6. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . I
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END J
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision; 2004 April AT-125 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP)

Component Inspection ACS004K5

TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

Resistance check
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
3. Disconnect control valve assembly harness connector.
4. Check resistance between terminal and ground.
Terminal No. Resistance (Ω)
Solenoid Valve Connector No.
(Wire color) (Approx.)
Torque converter clutch
F301 11 (BR) - Ground 3-9Ω
solenoid valve
5. If NG, replace control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control
Valve Assembly" .

SCIA3061E

Operation check
● Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
applying battery voltage to the terminal 11 and ground.

SCIA3105E

Revision; 2004 April AT-126 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE

DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE PFP:31940

A
Description ACS002CT

The line pressure solenoid valve regulates the oil pump discharge pressure to suit the driving condition in
response to a signal sent from the TCM. B
The line pressure duty cycle value is not consistent when the closed throttle position signal is “ON”.
To confirm the line pressure duty cycle at low pressure, the accelerator (throttle) should be open until
the closed throttle position signal is “OFF”.
AT
On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002CU

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “L/PRESS SOL/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or P0745 without CONSULT-II is D
detected under the following conditions.
– When TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve.
E
– When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value.
Possible Cause ACS002CV

● Harness or connectors F
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
● Line pressure solenoid valve
G
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002CW

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” H
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II I
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“ENGINE” with CONSULT-II.
2. Engine start and wait at least 5 second. J
3. If DTC is detected, go to “AT-129, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

L
SAT014K

WITH GST
M
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”.

Revision; 2004 April AT-127 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE

Wiring Diagram — AT — LPSV ACS002CX

TCWT0104E

Revision; 2004 April AT-128 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE

TCM terminal and Data are reference value. Measured between each terminals 5, 14, 24 and 46 (TCM ground).
Terminal Wire A
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color
After warming up the engine, release your foot from the
2V
Line pressure accelerator pedal.
1 B/R IGN ON B
solenoid valve After warming up the engine, press the accelerator pedal
0.7V
all the way down.

Diagnostic Procedure ACS002CY

AT
1. CHECK LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch to OFF. D
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector at the trans-
mission right side.
3. Check the resistance between terminal and ground. E

Solenoid valve Connector No. Terminal No Resistance (Approx.)

Line pressure solenoid 7(B/R) - F
F7 3-9Ω
valve Ground
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. G
NG >> GO TO 2. SCIA1833E

2. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY H

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .

2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector. I
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and control valve assembly harness connector.
Item Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Continuity J
A/T unit assembly
F7 7 (R/G)
harness connector
Control valve assem- Yes K
bly harness connec- F301 10 (R/G)
tor

4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. L

5. Reinstall any part removed. SCIA3065E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. M
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

3. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE

Check valve resistance
● Refer to AT-131, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .

Revision; 2004 April AT-129 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE

4. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect TCM connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and TCM connector.
Terminal No.
Item Connector No. Continuity
(Wire color)
TCM F103 1 (B/R)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes
F7 7 (B/R)
connector
SCIA1834E
4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Reinstall any part removed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-127, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 6.

6. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision; 2004 April AT-130 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE

Component Inspection ACS004K6

LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE A

Resistance check
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . B
3. Disconnect control valve assembly harness connector.
4. Check resistance between terminal and ground.
AT
Terminal No. Resistance (Ω)
Solenoid Valve Connector No.
(Wire color) (Approx.)
Line pressure solenoid 10 (OR) - D
F301 3-9Ω
valve Ground
5. If NG, replace control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control
Valve Assembly" . E

SCIA3066E
F
Operation check
● Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
applying battery voltage to the terminal 10 and ground. G

SCIA3067E

Revision; 2004 April AT-131 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1701 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (POWER SUPPLY)

DTC P1701 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (POWER SUPPLY) PFP:31036

Description ACS002CZ

When the power supply to the TCM is cut “OFF”, for example because the battery is removed, and the self-
diagnostics memory function stops, malfunction is detected.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002D0

● This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “TCM-POWER SUPPLY” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM does not
receive the voltage signal from the battery power supply.
● This is not a malfunction message. (Whenever shutting “OFF” a power supply to the TCM, this message
appears on the screen.)
Possible Cause ACS002D1

Harness or connectors
(Battery or ignition switch and TCM circuit is open or shorted.)
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002D2

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Wait for at least 2 consecutive seconds.
4. If DTC is detected, go to AT-135, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SAT014K

Revision; 2004 April AT-132 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1701 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (POWER SUPPLY)

Wiring Diagram — AT — POWER ACS004LF

AT

TCWT0105E

Revision; 2004 April AT-133 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1701 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (POWER SUPPLY)

TCWT0106E

Revision; 2004 April AT-134 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1701 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (POWER SUPPLY)

TCM terminals and Data are reference value. Measured between each terminals 5, 14, 24 and 46 (TCM ground).
Terminal Wire A
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color
IGN ON – Battery voltage
2 W Power supply Measure 3 seconds after switching “OFF” the ignition B
IGN OFF 0V
switch.
IGN ON – Battery voltage
3 W Power supply Measure 3 seconds after switching “OFF” the ignition AT
IGN OFF 0V
switch.
5 B Ground – – –
Power supply D
9 R/W Always Battery voltage
(Memory back-up)

Power supply IGN ON – Battery voltage

12 Y/R E
(out) IGN OFF – 0V
14 B Ground – – –
24 B Ground – – – F
IGN ON – Battery voltage
33 Y/R Power supply
IGN OFF – 0V
IGN ON – Battery voltage G
42 Y/R Power supply
IGN OFF – 0V
46 B Ground – – –
H
Diagnostic Procedure ACS004K8

1. CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE, STEP 1 I

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. (Do not start engine.)
2. Check voltage between TCM terminal and ground.
J
Item Connector No. Terminal No. Voltage
TCM F103 9 - Ground Battery voltage
OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3.
L
SCIA1163E

2. CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE, STEP 2 M

1. Turn ignition switch ON.

2. Check voltage between TCM terminal and ground.
Item Connector No. Terminal No. Voltage
2 - Ground
3 - Ground
F103
9 - Ground
TCM Battery voltage
12 - Ground
33 - Ground
F104 PCIA0063E
42 - Ground
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.

Revision; 2004 April AT-135 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1701 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (POWER SUPPLY)

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

Check the following items:
● Harness for short or open between battery and TCM terminal 9
● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and TCM terminals 2, 3, 33 and 42
● 15A fuse [No.34, located in the fuse block (J/B) and fusible link block] and 10A fuse (No. 71, located in the
IPDM E/R)
● Ignition switch; Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT"
● A/T PV IGN relay; Refer to AT-137, "Component Inspection"
● ECM relay; Refer to EC-133, "POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM"
● Harness for short or open between IPDM E/R terminal 33 and A/T PV IGN relay terminal 2
● Harness for short or open between A/T PV IGN relay terminal 1 and ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

4. CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect TCM harness connector.
3. Check continuity between TCM terminals 5, 14, 24, 46 and
ground.
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.

SCIA1161E

5. CHECK DTC
Check again. Refer to AT-132, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 6.

6. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision; 2004 April AT-136 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1701 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (POWER SUPPLY)

Component Inspection ACS004K9

A/T PV IGN RELAY A

1. Apply 12V direct current between A/T PV IGN relay terminals 1
and 2.
2. Check continuity between relay terminals 3 and 5. B

Condition Continuity
12V direct current supply between AT
Yes
terminals 1 and 2
OFF No

3. If NG, replace A/T PV IGN relay. D

SCIA1245E

Revision; 2004 April AT-137 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1702 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (RAM)

DTC P1702 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (RAM) PFP:31036

Description ACS002D6

The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal

input and output and for power supply. The TCM controls the A/T.

SCIA1287E

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002D7

● This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “TCM·RAM” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM memory RAM is malfunc-
tioning.
Possible Cause ACS002D8

TCM
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002D9

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for A/T with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine.
4. Run engine for at least 2 consecutive seconds at idle speed.
5. If DTC is detected, go to AT-139, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SAT014K

Revision; 2004 April AT-138 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1702 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (RAM)

Diagnostic Procedure ACS002DA

1. CHECK DTC A

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) B
2. Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-
II.
3. Touch “ERASE”. AT
4. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
5. Perform DTC confirmation procedure, AT-138, "DTC Confirma-
D
tion Procedure" .
Is the “TCM·RAM” displayed again?
Yes >> Replace TCM. E
No >> INSPECTION END SCIA5304E

Revision; 2004 April AT-139 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1703 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (ROM)

DTC P1703 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (ROM) PFP:31036

Description ACS002DB

The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal

input and output and for power supply. The TCM controls the A/T.

SCIA1287E

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002DC

● This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “TCM·ROM” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM memory ROM is malfunc-
tioning.
Possible Cause ACS002DD

TCM
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002DE

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for A/T with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine.
4. Run engine for at least 2 consecutive seconds at idle speed.
5. If DTC is detected, go to AT-141, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SAT014K

Revision; 2004 April AT-140 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1703 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (ROM)

Diagnostic Procedure ACS002DF

1. CHECK DTC A

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) B
2. Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-
II.
3. Touch “ERASE”. AT
4. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
5. Perform DTC confirmation procedure, AT-140, "DTC Confirma-
D
tion Procedure" .
Is the “TCM·ROM” displayed again?
Yes >> Replace TCM. E
No >> INSPECTION END SCIA5304E

Revision; 2004 April AT-141 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1704 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (EEPROM)

DTC P1704 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (EEPROM) PFP:31036

Description ACS002DG

The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal

input and output and for power supply. The TCM controls the A/T.

SCIA1287E

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002DH

● This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “TCM·EEPROM” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM memory EEPROM is
malfunctioning.
Possible Cause ACS002DI

TCM
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002DJ

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for A/T with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine.
4. Run engine for at least 2 consecutive seconds at idle speed.
5. If DTC is detected, go to AT-143, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SAT014K

Revision; 2004 April AT-142 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1704 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (EEPROM)

Diagnostic Procedure ACS002DK

1. CHECK DTC A

With CONSULT-II
1. Connect CONSULT-II to data link connector. B
2. Turn ignition switch ON . Confirm that CONSULT-II turn ON.
3. Move selector lever in “R” position.
AT
4. Touch “START” on CONSULT-II.
5. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-
II.
D
6. Fully press the accelerator pedal (8/8 throttle), and hold it in the
fully open position. (This will set the closed throttle position sig-
nal to OFF.)
E
7. Touch “ERASE“ on CONSULT-II, and then touch “YES”. SCIA5304E

8. Wait 3 seconds and then release the accelerator pedal.

9. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. F
10. Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-142, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
Is the “TCM·EEPROM” displayed again?
Yes >> Replace TCM. G
No >> INSPECTION END

Revision; 2004 April AT-143 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR PFP:22620

Description ACS002DL

Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, accelerator pedal position sensor, throttle
position sensor, etc. The actuator sends a signal to the ECM, and ECM sends signals to TCM with CAN com-
munication.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002DM

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “TP SEN/CIRC A/T” with CONSULT-II or P1705 without CONSULT-II is detected
when TCM does not receive the proper accelerator pedal position signals (input by CAN communication)
from ECM.
Possible Cause ACS002DN

Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002DO

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
4. If DTC is detected, go to “AT-144, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SAT014K

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”.
Diagnostic Procedure ACS002DP

1. CHECK DTC WITH ECM

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “ENGINE” with CON-
SULT-II. Refer to EC-107, "CONSULT-II Function"
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Check the DTC detected [Link] to EC-107, "CON-
SULT-II Function" .
● If CAN communication line is detected, go to AT-98, SAT014K

"DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .

Revision; 2004 April AT-144 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

2. CHECK DTC WITH TCM A

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
B
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Depress accelerator pedal and read out the value of “ACCLE
POS” and “THROTTLE POSI”. AT
Check engine speed changes according to throttle position.
4. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “ENGINE” with CON-
SULT-II. Refer to EC-111, "SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE" . D
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. PCIA0070E
E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
F
3. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-144, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . G
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 4. H
4. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . I
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
J
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision; 2004 April AT-145 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT PFP:31940

Description ACS002DQ

The A/T fluid temperature sensor detects the A/T fluid temperature and sends a signal to the TCM.
CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS002DR

Item name Condition Display value (Approx.) (V)

Fluid temperature sensor 1 2.2 - 1.8 - 0.6
0°C (32°F) - 20°C (68°F) - 80°C (176°F)
Fluid temperature sensor 2 2.2 - 1.7 - 0.45

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002DS

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or P1710 (A/T), P0710 (ENGINE) with-
out CONSULT-II is detected when TCM receives an excessively low or high voltage from the sensor.
Possible Cause ACS002DT

● Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
● A/T fluid temperature sensors 1, 2
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002DU

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 10
minutes (Total). (It is not necessary to maintain continuously.)
VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.0/8
Selector lever: “D” position
4. If DTC is detected, go to AT-148, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SAT014K

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”.

Revision; 2004 April AT-146 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

Wiring Diagram — AT — FTS ACS002DV

AT

TCWT0107E

Revision; 2004 April AT-147 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

TCM terminals and Data are reference value. Measured between each terminals 5, 14, 24 and 46 (TCM ground).
Terminal Wire
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color
When ATF temperature 0°C (32°F) 2.2V
Fluid temperature
8 B/OR IGN ON When ATF temperature 20°C (68°F) 1.8V
sensor 1
When ATF temperature 80°C (176°F) 0.6V
15 B/W SEL4 – – –
When ATF temperature about 0°C (32°F) 2.2V
Fluid temperature
17 G/R IGN ON When ATF temperature about 20°C (68°F) 1.7V
sensor 2
When ATF temperature about 80°C (176°F) 0.45V

Diagnostic Procedure ACS002DW

1. CHECK FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR (WITH CONSULT-II)

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out the value of “ATF TEMP SE 1” or “ATF TEMP SE 2”.
Item name Condition °C (°F) Display value (Approx.) V
ATF TEMP SE1 2.2 - 1.8 - 0.6
0 (32) - 20 (68) - 80 (176)
ATF TEMP SE2 2.2 - 1.7 - 0.45
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. PCIA0039E

NG >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS (WITHOUT CONSULT-II)

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage between TCM connector and ground while warming up A/T. Refer to AT-147, "Wiring Dia-
gram — AT — FTS" .
Connector Temperature Voltage (V)
Name Terminal No.
No. °C (°F) (Approx.)
0 (32) 2.2
Fluid tempera- 8 (B/OR) - 5 (B), 14
20 (68) 1.8
ture sensor 1 (B), 24 (B) or 46 (B)
80 (176) 0.6
F103
0 (32) 2.2
Fluid tempera- 17 (G/R) - 5 (B), 14
20 (68) 1.7
ture sensor 2 (B), 24 (B) or 46 (B)
80 (176) 0.45
SCIA1162E
3. Turn ignition switch OFF.
4. Disconnect the TCM connector.
5. Check if there is continuity between the connector terminal and ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.

Revision; 2004 April AT-148 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

3. CHECK FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT A

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector at the transmission right side.
3. Check the resistance between terminal and ground. B

Connector Terminal No. Tempera- Resistance

Name
No. (Wire color) ture °C (°F) (KΩ) (Approx.)
AT
0 (32) 15
Fluid
temperature F6 9 (B/OR) - 8(B/W) 20 (68) 6.5
sensor 1 D
80 (176) 0.9
0 (32) 10
Fluid
temperature F7 1 (G/R) - 8(B/W) 20 (68) 4
sensor 2 E
SCIA3614E
80 (176) 0.5
4. Reinstall any part removed.
OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 4.
G
4. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY
1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
H
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and control valve assembly harness connector.
I
Item Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Continuity
A/T unit assembly
F6 8 (BR)
harness connector J
Control valve assem- Yes
bly harness connec- F302 6 (BR)
tor
K
A/T unit assembly
F6 9 (B/Y)
harness connector
Control valve assem- Yes
L
bly harness connec- F302 7 (B/Y)
tor
A/T unit assembly
F7 1 (P) M
harness connector
Control valve assem- Yes
bly harness connec- F301 3 (P)
tor

4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.

5. Reinstall any part removed.
SCIA3558E
OK or NG
OK - 1 >> If fluid temperature sensor 1 on step 3 is NG, replace the control valve assmebly.
OK - 2 >> If fluide temperature sensor 2 on step 3 is NG, GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

Revision; 2004 April AT-149 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

5. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 AND CONTROL VALVE ASSEM-
BLY
1. Disconnect fluid temperature sensor 2 harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector.
2. Check continuity between fluid temperature sensor 2 harness
connector and control valve assembly harness connector.
Item Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Continuity
Fluid temperature
sensor 2 harness F305 1 (GY)
connector
Yes
Control valve assem-
bly harness connec- F301 3 (GY)
tor

OK or NG SCIA3069E

OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

6. CHECK FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2

Check fluid temperature sensor 2.
● Refer to AT-151, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

Check the following items:
● Harness for short to ground or short to power or open between TCM and A/T unit assembly harness con-
nector.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

8. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-146, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 9.

9. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision; 2004 April AT-150 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

Component Inspection ACS004KA

FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 A

1. Remove fluid temperature sensor 2. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Check resistance between terminal 1 and 2.
B
Terminal No. Tempera- Resistance
Name Connector No.
(Wire color) ture °C (°F) (KΩ) (Approx.)
0 (32) 10 AT
Fluid
temperature F305 1 (GY) - 2 (B/R) 20 (68) 4
sensor 2
80 (176) 0.5
D

SCIA3070E
E

Revision; 2004 April AT-151 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR

DTC P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR PFP:31935

Description ACS002DX

The turbine revolution sensor detects input shaft rpm (revolutions per minute). It is located on the input side of
the automatic transmission. Monitors revolution of sensor 1 and sensor 2 for non-standard conditions.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002DY

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “TURBINE REV S/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or P1716 without CONSULT-II is
detected under the following conditions.
– When TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor.
– When TCM detects an irregularity only at position of 4th gear for turbine revolution sensor 2.
Possible Cause ACS002DZ

● Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
● Turbine revolution sensor 1, 2
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002E0

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 5
consecutive seconds.
VHCL SPEED SE: 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more
ENGINE SPEED: 1,500 rpm or more
ACCELE POS: 0.5/8 or more
Selector lever: “D” position
Gear position (Turbine revolution sensor 1): 4th or 5th posi-
tion
Gear position (Turbine revolution sensor 2): All position SAT014K

Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased

engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test.
4. If DTC is detected, go to AT-154, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”.

Revision; 2004 April AT-152 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR

Wiring Diagram — AT — TRSA/T ACS002E1

AT

TCWT0108E

Revision; 2004 April AT-153 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR

TCM terminal and Data are reference value. Measured between each terminals 5, 14, 24 and 46 (TCM ground).
Terminal Wire
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color

Power supply IGN ON – Battery voltage

12 Y/R
(out) IGN OFF – 0V
When running at 50 km/h (31 MPH) in 4th gear with the
closed throttle position signal “OFF”, use the CONSULT-II
Turbine revolution pulse frequency measuring function.
36 L/Y
sensor 1 CAUTION:
Connect the data link connector to the vehicle-side
When diagnosis connector.
vehicle 1.3 (kHz)
cruises When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH) in 1st gear with the
closed throttle position signal “OFF”, use the CONSULT-II
Turbine revolution pulse frequency measuring function.
45 PU
sensor 2 CAUTION:
Connect the data link connector to the vehicle-side
diagnosis connector.

Diagnostic Procedure ACS002E2

1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Vehicle start and read out the value of “TURBINE REV”.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 2.
PCIA0041E

Revision; 2004 April AT-154 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR

2. CHECK TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR (WITH CONSULT-II) A

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
B
2. Check the pulse when vehicle cruises.
Name Condition
When running at 50 km/h (31 MPH) in 4th gear with the AT
closed throttle position signal “OFF”, use the CONSULT-II
Turbine revolution pulse frequency measuring function.
sensor 1 CAUTION:
D
Connect the data link connector to the vehicle-side diag-
nosis connector.
When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH) in 1st gear with the PCIA0042E

closed throttle position signal “OFF”, use the CONSULT-II E

Turbine revolution pulse frequency measuring function.
sensor 2 CAUTION:
Connect the data link connector to the vehicle-side diag- F
nosis connector.

Data
Item Connector No. Terminal No. Name G
(Approx.)
36 (L/Y) Turbine revolution sensor 1
TCM F104 1.3 (kHz)
45 (PU) Turbine revolution sensor 2 H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 3. I

3. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND A/T UNIT ASSEMBLY HARNESS CONNECTOR
J
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect TCM connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
K
and TCM connector.
Terminal No.
Item Connector No. Continuity
(Wire color) L
TCM F103 12 (Y/R)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes
F6 1 (Y/R)
connector M
TCM F104 36 (L/Y)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes
F8 6 (L/Y)
connector
TCM F104 45 (PU)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes
F8 7 (PU)
connector
4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Reinstall any part removed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.
SCIA3071E

Revision; 2004 April AT-155 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR

4. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and control valve assembly harness connector.
Item Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Continuity
A/T unit assembly
F6 1 (B)
harness connector
Control valve assem- Yes
bly harness connec- F302 8 (B)
tor
A/T unit assembly
F8 6 (B/OR)
harness connector
Control valve assem- Yes
bly harness connec- F301 1 (B/OR)
tor
A/T unit assembly
F8 7 (OR)
harness connector
Control valve assem- Yes
bly harness connec- F301 2 (OR)
tor

4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.

5. Reinstall any part removed.
SCIA3072E
OK or NG
OK >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

5. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-152, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 6.

6. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision; 2004 April AT-156 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR

DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR PFP:24814

A
Description ACS002E3

The vehicle speed sensor·MTR signal is transmitted from combination meter to TCM by CAN communication
line. The signal functions as an auxiliary device to the revolution sensor when it is malfunctioning. The TCM B
will then use the vehicle speed sensor·MTR signal.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002E4

AT
● This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
● Diagnostic trouble code “VHE SPD SE·MTR” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM does not receive
the proper vehicle speed sensor MTR signal (input by CAN communication) from combination meter.
D
Possible Cause ACS002E5

Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) E

DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002E6

CAUTION: F
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” G
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II H
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 I
consecutive seconds.
ACCELE POS: 1/8 or less
VHCL SPEED SE: 30 km/h (17 MPH) or more J
4. If DTC is detected, go to AT-157, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

K
SAT014K

Diagnostic Procedure ACS002E7

L
1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS (WITH CONSULT-II)
With CONSULT-II
M
1. Start engine.
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Drive vehicle and read out the value of “VHCL/S SE·MTR”.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.

PCIA0033E

Revision; 2004 April AT-157 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR

2. CHECK DTC, STEP 1

Check following items.
1. Refer to AT-98, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
2. Refer to BRC-29, "CONSULT-II Functions" .
3. Refer to DI-4, "COMBINATION METERS" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> If NG, recheck pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

3. CHECK DTC, STEP 2

Perform DTC confirmation procedure. AT-157, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> If the system returns a malfunction, recheck pin terminals for damage or loose connection with
harness connector.

Revision; 2004 April AT-158 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1730 A/T INTERLOCK

DTC P1730 A/T INTERLOCK PFP:00000

A
Description ACS002E8

● Fail-safe function to detect interlock conditions.

● Fail-safe function to the transmission range switch detects the selector position and sends a signal to the B
TCM.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002E9
AT
● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
● Diagnostic trouble code “A/T INTERLOCK” with CONSULT-II or P1730 without CONSULT-II is detected
when TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor and switch. D
● TCM monitors and compares gear position and conditions of each pressure switch when gear is steady.
Possible Cause ACS002EA
E
● Harness or connectors
(The solenoid and switch circuit is open or shorted.)
● Low coast brake solenoid valve
F
● ATF pressure switch 2
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002EB

NOTE: G
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. H
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
I
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine.
4. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 2 J
consecutive seconds.
Selector lever: “D” position
5. If DTC is detected, go to AT-164, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
K

SAT014K
L
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”.
M

Revision; 2004 April AT-159 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1730 A/T INTERLOCK

Wiring Diagram — AT — I/LOCK ACS002EC

TCWT0109E

Revision; 2004 April AT-160 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1730 A/T INTERLOCK

AT

TCWT0110E

Revision; 2004 April AT-161 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1730 A/T INTERLOCK

TCWT0111E

Revision; 2004 April AT-162 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1730 A/T INTERLOCK

TCM terminals and Data are reference value. Measured between each terminals 5, 14, 24 and 46 (TCM ground).
Terminal Wire A
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color
SEL3 (pressure
4 P/L – – –
switch 3)
B
When the solenoid valve operating (in 1st gear, 2nd gear,
More than 2V
Input clutch sole- or 3rd gear)
10 OR
noid valve When the solenoid valve is not operating (4th gear or 5th
0V AT
gear)
When the solenoid valve operating [6 km/h (4MPH) or
High & low When More than 2V
faster in 1st gear or 2nd gear]
11 R/L reverse clutch vehicle D
solenoid valve cruises When the solenoid valve is not operating [6 km/h (4MPH)
0V
or slower in 1st gear or 3rd, 4th, or 5th gear]
When the solenoid valve is operating (when running in E
Battery voltage
Low coast brake M1-1 gear or M2-2 gear)
13 W/L
solenoid valve When the solenoid valve is not operating (when running in
0V
“D”)
F
SEL1 (pressure
16 W/G – – –
switch 2)
When the solenoid valve is operating (other than 4th
Front brake sole- gear)
More than 2V G
19 R/B
noid valve
When When the solenoid valve is not operating (4th gear) 0V
vehicle When the solenoid valve is operating (1st gear or 5th
cruises More than 2V H
Direct clutch sole- gear)
21 G
noid valve When the solenoid valve is not operating (2nd gear, 3rd
0V
gear, or 4th gear)
I
SEL2 (pressure
22 P/B – – –
switch 5)

PSC2 (pressure When high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve “ON”. 0V
26 G/Y J
switch 6) When When high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve “OFF”. Battery voltage
vehicle
PSB2 (pressure cruises When front brake solenoid valve “OFF”. Battery voltage
35 B/Y
switch 1) When front brake solenoid valve“ ON”. 0V K
40 Y/G DATA BIT1 – – –

Revision; 2004 April AT-163 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1730 A/T INTERLOCK

Judgement of A/T Interlock ACS002ED

When A/T Interlock is judged to be malfunctioning, the vehicle should be fixed in 2nd gear and should be set in
a condition in which it can travel.
When one of the following fastening patterns is detected, the fail-safe function in correspondence with the indi-
vidual pattern should be performed.
A/T INTERLOCK COUPLING PATTERN TABLE
●: NG, X: OK
Clutch pressure output pattern after fail-safe func-
ATF pressure switch output
tion
Fail-safe
Gear position SW6
SW3 SW5 SW1 SW2 function
(HLR/ I/C HLR/C D/C FR/B LC/B L/U
(I/C) (D/C) (FR/B) (LC/B)
C)
Held in
3rd – X X – ● OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
2nd gear
A/T inter-
Held in
lock cou- 4th – X X – ● OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
2nd gear
pling pattern
Held in
5th X X – X ● OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
2nd gear

Diagnostic Procedure ACS002EE

1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-
II.
3. Drive vehicle.

SAT014K

Without CONSULT-II
1. Drive vehicle.
2. Stop vehicle and turn ignition switch OFF.
3. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
4. Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-96, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> ● Check low coast brake solenoid valve circuit and function. Refer to AT-208, "DTC P1772 LOW
COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-213, "DTC P1774 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID
VALVE FUNCTION" .

2. CHECK DTC
Perform "DTC confirmation Procedure". Refer to AT-159, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 3.

Revision; 2004 April AT-164 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1730 A/T INTERLOCK

3. CHECK TCM A
1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG B
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
AT

Revision; 2004 April AT-165 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1731 A/T 1ST ENGINE BRAKING

DTC P1731 A/T 1ST ENGINE BRAKING PFP:00000

Description ACS002EF

Fail-safe function to prevent sudden decrease in speed by engine brake other than at 1M position.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002EG

● This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “A/T 1ST E/BRAKING” with CONSULT-II or 13th judgement flicker without CON-
SULT-II is detected under the following condition.
– When TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor.
– When TCM monitors each pressure switch and solenoid monitor value, and detects as irregular when
engine brake of 1st gear acts other than at 1M position.
Possible Cause ACS002EH

● Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
● Low coast brake solenoid valve
● ATF pressure switch 2
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002EI

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine.
4. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 2
consecutive seconds.
ENGINE SPEED: 1,200 rpm
Selector lever: “D” position
Gear position: 1st gear
5. If DTC is detected, go to AT-168, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SAT014K

Revision; 2004 April AT-166 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1731 A/T 1ST ENGINE BRAKING

Wiring Diagram — AT — E/BRE ACS002EJ

AT

TCWT0112E

Revision; 2004 April AT-167 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1731 A/T 1ST ENGINE BRAKING

TCM terminals and Data are reference value. Measured between each terminals 5, 14, 24 and 46 (TCM ground).
Terminal Wire
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color

When When the solenoid valve is operating (when running in M1-1

Low coast brake Battery voltage
13 W/L vehicle gear or M2-2 gear)
solenoid valve
cruises When the solenoid valve is not operating (when running in “D”) 0V
SEL1 (pressure
16 W/G – –
switch 2)
40 Y/G DATA BIT1 – –

Diagnostic Procedure ACS004KB

1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” or “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA
MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Accelerate vehicle in the “D” position (1st gear), and confirm the
ON/OFF actuation of the “ATF PRES SW 2”.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.

PCIA0067E

2. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND A/T UNIT ASSEMBLY HARNESS CONNECTOR
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect TCM connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and TCM connector.
Terminal No.
Item Connector No. Continuity
(Wire color)
TCM F103 13 (W/L)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes
F7 2 (W/L)
connector
TCM F103 16 (W/G)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes
F6 5 (W/G)
connector
TCM F104 40 (Y/G)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes
F6 2 (Y/G)
connector

4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.

5. Reinstall any part removed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.
SCIA3095E

Revision; 2004 April AT-168 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1731 A/T 1ST ENGINE BRAKING

3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY A

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector B
and control valve assembly harness connector.
Item Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Continuity
AT
A/T unit assembly
F6 2 (R)
harness connector
Control valve assem- Yes
D
bly harness connec- F302 10 (R)
tor
A/T unit assembly
F6 5 (L) E
harness connector
Control valve assem- Yes
bly harness connec- F302 13 (L)
tor F
A/T unit assembly
F7 2 (B/R)
harness connector
Control valve assem- Yes G
bly harness connec- F301 4 (B/R)
tor

4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. H

5. Reinstall any part removed.
SCIA3107E
OK or NG
OK >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . I
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK DTC J

Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-166, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .

OK or NG K
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 5.

5. CHECK TCM L

1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. M
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision; 2004 April AT-169 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

DTC P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE PFP:31940

Description ACS002EL

Input clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP switch, vehicle
speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will then be shifted to the
optimum position.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002EM

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “I/C SOLENOID/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or P1752 without CONSULT-II is
detected under the following conditions.
– When TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve.
– When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value.
Possible Cause ACS002EN

● Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
● Input clutch solenoid valve
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002EO

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine.
4. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 5
consecutive seconds.
ACCELE POS: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8
Selector lever: “D” position
Gear position: 3rd Þ 4th Gear (I/C ON/OFF)
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased
engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions
required for this test. SAT014K

5. If DTC is detected go to “AT-172, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”.

Revision; 2004 April AT-170 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

Wiring Diagram — AT — I/C ACS002EP

AT

TCWT0113E

Revision; 2004 April AT-171 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

TCM terminal and Data are reference value. Measured between each terminals 5, 14, 24 and 46 (TCM ground).
Terminal Wire
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color
When the solenoid valve operating (in 1st gear, 2nd gear,
When More than 2V
Input clutch sole- or 3rd gear)
10 OR vehicle
noid valve When the solenoid valve is not operating (4th gear or 5th
cruises 0V
gear)

Diagnostic Procedure ACS002EQ

1. CHECK INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector at the trans-
mission right side.
3. Check the resistance between terminal and ground.

Solenoid valve Connector No. Terminal No. Resistance (Approx.)

Input clutch solenoid 6 (OR) -
F7 3-9Ω
valve Ground
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2. SCIA1837E

2. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and control valve assembly harness connector.
Item Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Continuity
A/T unit assembly
F7 6 (R/W)
harness connector
Control valve assem- Yes
bly harness connec- F301 9 (R/W)
tor

4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG SCIA3073E

OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

3. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE

Check valve resistance
● Refer to AT-174, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .

Revision; 2004 April AT-172 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

4. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT A

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect TCM connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector B
and TCM connector.
Terminal No.
Item Connector No. Continuity AT
(Wire color)
TCM F103 10 (OR)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes
F7 6 (OR) D
connector
SCIA1838E
4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Reinstall any part removed. E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. F

5. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-170, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . G
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
H
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

6. CHECK TCM
I
1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG J
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
K

Revision; 2004 April AT-173 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

Component Inspection ACS004KC

INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

Resistance check
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
3. Disconnect control valve assembly harness connector.
4. Check resistance between terminal and ground.
Terminal No. Resistance (Ω)
Solenoid Valve Connector No.
(Wire color) (Approx.)
Input clutch solenoid
F301 9 (G) - Ground 3-9Ω
valve
5. If NG, replace control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control
Valve Assembly" .

SCIA3074E

Operation check
● Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
applying battery voltage to the terminal 9 and ground.

SCIA3108E

Revision; 2004 April AT-174 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1754 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION

DTC P1754 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION PFP:31940

A
Description ACS002ER

● Input clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP switch, vehi-
cle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will then be B
shifted to the optimum position.
● This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but also by mechanical mal-
function such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation. AT
On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002ES

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

D
● Diagnostic trouble code “I/C SOLENOID FNCTN” with CONSULT-II or P1754 without CONSULT-II is
detected under the following conditions.
– When TCM detects that actual gear ratio is irregular, and relation between gear position and condition of
E
ATF pressure switch 3 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
– When TCM detects that relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 3 is irregular
during releasing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
F
Possible Cause ACS002ET

● Harness or connectors
(The solenoid and switch circuits are open or shorted.) G
● Input clutch solenoid valve
● ATF pressure switch 3
H
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002EU

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. I
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. J
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine. K
2. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following condition.
ACCELE POSI: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8
Selector lever: “D” position L
Gear position: 3rd Þ 4th Gear (I/C ON/OFF)
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased
engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions
required for this test. M
3. Perform step “2” again.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, then perform step “1” to “3” again.
SAT014K
5. Check “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-
II. If DTC (P1754) is detected, refer to AT-177, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If DTC (P1752) is detected, go to AT-172, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If DTC (P1843) is detected, go to AT-227, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”.

Revision; 2004 April AT-175 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1754 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION

Wiring Diagram — AT — I/CF ACS002EV

TCWT0114E

Revision; 2004 April AT-176 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1754 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION

TCM terminal and Data are reference value. Measured between each terminals 5, 14, 24 and 46 (TCM ground).
Terminal Wire A
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color
SEL3
4 P/L – –
(pressure switch 3)
B
When the solenoid valve operating (in 1st gear, 2nd gear,
R/W When More than 2V
Input clutch sole- or 3rd gear)
10 or vehicle
noid valve When the solenoid valve is not operating (4th gear or 5th
OR cruises 0V AT
gear)
40 Y/G DATA BIT1 – –

Diagnostic Procedure ACS004KD

D

1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS

With CONSULT-II E
1. Start engine.
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” or “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA
MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. F
3. Accelerate vehicle in the “D” position (3rd Þ 4th gear), and con-
firm the ON/OFF actuation of the “ATF PRES SW 3”.
G
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
OK or NG
H
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2. PCIA0067E

2. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND A/T UNIT ASSEMBLY HARNESS CONNECTOR I

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect TCM connector. J
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and TCM connector.
Terminal No.
K
Item Connector No. Continuity
(Wire color)
TCM F103 4 (P/L)
Yes
L
A/T unit assembly harness
F6 7 (P/L)
connector
TCM F103 10 (OR)
M
A/T unit assembly harness Yes
F7 6 (OR)
connector
TCM F104 40 (Y/G)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes
F6 2 (Y/G)
connector

4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.

5. Reinstall any part removed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.
SCIA3109E

Revision; 2004 April AT-177 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1754 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION

3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and control valve assembly harness connector.
Item Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Continuity
A/T unit assembly
F6 2 (R)
harness connector
Control valve assem- Yes
bly harness connec- F302 10 (R)
tor
A/T unit assembly
F6 7 (W)
harness connector
Control valve assem- Yes
bly harness connec- F302 15 (W)
tor
A/T unit assembly
F7 6 (R/W)
harness connector
Control valve assem- Yes
bly harness connec- F301 9 (R/W)
tor

4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.

5. Reinstall any part removed.
SCIA3075E
OK or NG
OK >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-175, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 5.

5. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision; 2004 April AT-178 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE

DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE PFP:31940

A
Description ACS002EX

Front brake solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP switch, vehicle
speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will then be shifted to the B
optimum position.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002EY

AT
● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
● Diagnostic trouble code “FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or P1757 without CONSULT-II is
detected under the following conditions.
D
– When TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve.
– When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value.
Possible Cause ACS002EZ E
● Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
● Front brake solenoid valve F

DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002F0

CAUTION: G
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” H
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II I
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine. J
4. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 5
consecutive seconds.
ACCELE POS: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8 K
Selector lever: “D” position
Gear position: 3rd Þ 4th Gear (FR/B ON/OFF)
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased L
engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions
required for this test. SAT014K

5. If DTC is detected go to AT-181, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

M
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”.

Revision; 2004 April AT-179 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE

Wiring Diagram — AT — FR/B ACS002F1

TCWT0115E

Revision; 2004 April AT-180 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE

TCM terminal and Data are reference value. Measured between each terminals 5, 14, 24 and 46 (TCM ground).
Terminal Wire A
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color

When When the solenoid valve is operating (other than 4th

Front brake sole- More than 2V
19 R/B vehicle gear)
noid valve B
starts When the solenoid valve is not operating (4th gear) 0V

Diagnostic Procedure ACS004KE

AT
1. CHECK FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector at the trans- D
mission right side.
3. Check the resistance between terminal and ground.
E
Terminal No.
Solenoid valve Connector No. Resistance (Approx.)
(Wire color)
Front brake solenoid 5 (R/B) - F
F7 3-9Ω
valve Ground

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. G
SCIA1839E
NG >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY H

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector.
I
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and control valve assembly harness connector.
Item Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Continuity J
A/T unit assembly
F7 5 (W/R)
harness connector
Control valve assem- Yes K
bly harness connec- F301 8 (W/R)
tor
4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. L
OK or NG SCIA3076E

OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. M

3. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE

Check valve resistance
● Refer to AT-183, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .

Revision; 2004 April AT-181 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE

4. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect TCM connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and TCM connector.
Terminal No.
Item Connector No. Continuity
(Wire color)
TCM F103 19 (R/B)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes
F7 5 (R/B)
connector
SCIA1840E
4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Reinstall any part removed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-179, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 6.

6. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision; 2004 April AT-182 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE

Component Inspection ACS004KF

FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE A

Resistance check
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . B
3. Disconnect control valve assembly harness connector.
4. Check resistance between terminal and ground.
AT
Terminal No. Resistance (Ω)
Solenoid Valve Connector No.
(Wire color) (Approx.)
Front brake solenoid D
F301 8 (Y) - Ground 3-9Ω
valve
5. If NG, replace control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control
Valve Assembly" . E

SCIA3077E
F
Operation check
● Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
applying battery voltage to the terminal 8 and ground. G

SCIA3079E

Revision; 2004 April AT-183 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1759 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION

DTC P1759 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION PFP:31940

Description ACS002F3

● Front brake solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP switch, vehi-
cle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will then be
shifted to the optimum position.
● This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but also by mechanical mal-
function such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002F4

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “FR/B SOLENOID FNCT” with CONSULT-II or P1759 without CONSULT-II is
detected under the following conditions.
– When TCM detects that actual gear ratio is irregular, and relation between gear position and condition of
ATF pressure switch 1 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
– When TCM detects that relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 1 is irregular
during releasing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
Possible Cause ACS002F5

● Harness or connectors
(The solenoid and switch circuits are open or shorted.)
● Front brake solenoid valve
● ATF pressure switch 1
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002F6

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following condition.
ACCELE POS: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8
Selector lever: “D” position
Gear position: 3rd Þ 4th Gear (FR/B ON/OFF)
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased
engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions
required for this test.
3. Perform step “2” again.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, then perform step “1” to “3” again.
SAT014K
5. Check “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-
II. If DTC (P1759) is detected, refer to AT-186, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If DTC (P1757) is detected, go to AT-181, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If DTC (P1841) is detected, go to AT-223, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”.

Revision; 2004 April AT-184 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1759 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION

Wiring Diagram — AT — FR/BF ACS002F7

AT

TCWT0116E

Revision; 2004 April AT-185 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1759 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION

TCM terminal and Data are reference value. Measured between each terminals 5, 14, 24 and 46 (TCM ground).
Terminal Wire
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color

Front brake sole- When the solenoid valve is operating (other than 4th gear) More than 2V
19 R/B
noid valve When When the solenoid valve is not operating (4th gear) 0V
vehicle
PSB2 cruises When front brake solenoid valve “OFF”. Battery voltage
35 B/Y
(pressure switch 1) When front brake solenoid valve“ ON”. 0V

Diagnostic Procedure ACS004KG

1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS (WITH CONSULT-II)

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” or “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA
MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Accelerate vehicle in the “D” position (3rd Þ 4th gear), and con-
firm the ON/OFF actuation of the “ATF PRES SW 1”.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 3.

PCIA0067E

2. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS (WITHOUT CONSULT-II)

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Accelerate vehicle in the “D” position (3rd Þ 4th gear).
Connector Terminal No.
Solenoid valve Voltage
No. (Wire color)

Front brake solenoid OFF Battery voltage

F104 35 (B/Y) - Ground
valve ON Approx. 0 V

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. PCIA0066E

NG >> GO TO 3.

Revision; 2004 April AT-186 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1759 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION

3. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND A/T UNIT ASSEMBLY HARNESS CONNECTOR A
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect TCM connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector B
and TCM connector.
Terminal No.
Item Connector No. Continuity AT
(Wire color)
TCM F103 19 (R/B)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes
F7 5 (R/B) D
connector
TCM F104 35 (B/Y)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes E
F6 3 (B/Y)
connector
4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Reinstall any part removed. F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power G
in harness or connectors.

SCIA3080E

I
4. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY
1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector. J
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and control valve assembly harness connector.
K
Item Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Continuity
A/T unit assembly
F6 3 (G)
harness connector L
Control valve assem- Yes
bly harness connec- F302 12 (G)
tor
M
A/T unit assembly
F7 5 (W/R)
harness connector
Control valve assem- Yes
bly harness connec- F301 8 (W/R)
tor

4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.

5. Reinstall any part removed.
OK or NG
OK >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294,
"Control Valve Assembly" .
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.
SCIA3081E

Revision; 2004 April AT-187 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1759 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION

5. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-184, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 6.

6. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision; 2004 April AT-188 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE PFP:31940

A
Description ACS002F9

Direct clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP switch, vehicle
speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will then be shifted to the B
optimum position.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002FA

AT
● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
● Diagnostic trouble code “D/C SOLENOID/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or P1762 without CONSULT-II is
detected under the following conditions.
D
– When TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve.
– When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value.
Possible Cause ACS002FB E
● Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
● Direct clutch solenoid valve F

DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002FC

NOTE: G
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. H
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. I
3. Start engine.
4. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 5
consecutive seconds. J
ACCELE POS: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8
Selector lever: “D” position
Gear position: 1st Þ 2nd Gear (D/C ON/OFF) K
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased
engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions
required for this test. SAT014K
L
5. If DTC is detected, go to AT-191, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”. M

Revision; 2004 April AT-189 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

Wiring Diagram — AT — D/C ACS002FD

TCWT0117E

Revision; 2004 April AT-190 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

TCM terminal and Data are reference value. Measured between each terminals 5, 14, 24 and 46 (TCM ground).
Terminal Wire A
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color
When the solenoid valve is operating (1st gear or 5th
When More than 2V
Direct clutch sole- gear)
21 G vehicle B
noid valve When the solenoid valve is not operating (2nd gear, 3rd
cruises 0V
gear, or 4th gear)

Diagnostic Procedure ACS004KH

AT
1. CHECK DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. D
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector at the trans-
mission right side.
3. Check the resistance between terminal and ground. E

Terminal No.
Solenoid valve Connector No. Resistance (Approx.)
(Wire color)
F
Direct clutch solenoid
F7 4 (G) - Ground 3-9Ω
valve
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 4. SCIA1841E
NG >> GO TO 2.
H
2. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY
1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector. I
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and control valve assembly harness connector.
J
Item Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Continuity
A/T unit assembly
F7 4 (W/B)
harness connector K
Control valve assem- Yes
bly harness connec- F301 7 (W/B)
tor
L
4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG SCIA3082E

OK >> GO TO 3. M
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

3. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE

Check valve resistance
● Refer to AT-193, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .

Revision; 2004 April AT-191 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

4. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect TCM connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and TCM connector.
Terminal No.
Item Connector No. Continuity
(Wire color)
TCM F103 21 (G)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes
F7 4 (G)
connector
SCIA1842E
4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Reinstall any part removed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-189, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 6.

6. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision; 2004 April AT-192 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

Component Inspection ACS004KI

DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE A

Resistance check
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . B
3. Disconnect control valve assembly harness connector.
4. Check resistance between terminal and ground.
AT
Terminal No. Resistance (Ω)
Solenoid Valve Connector No.
(Wire color) (Approx.)
Direct clutch solenoid D
F301 7 (L) - Ground 3-9Ω
valve
5. If NG, replace control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control
Valve Assembly" . E

SCIA3083E
F
Operation check
● Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
applying battery voltage to the terminal 7 and ground. G

SCIA3084E

Revision; 2004 April AT-193 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1764 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION

DTC P1764 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION PFP:31940

Description ACS002FF

● Direct clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP switch,
vehicle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will then be
shifted to the optimum position.
● This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but also by mechanical mal-
function such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002FG

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “D/C SOLENOID FNCTN” with CONSULT-II or P1764 without CONSULT-II is
detected under the following conditions.
– When TCM detects that actual gear ratio is irregular, and relation between gear position and condition of
ATF pressure switch 5 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
– When TCM detects that relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 5 is irregular
during releasing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
Possible Cause ACS002FH

● Harness or connectors
(The solenoid and switch circuits are open or shorted.)
● Direct clutch solenoid valve
● ATF pressure switch 5
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002FI

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following condition.
ACCELE POS: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8
Selector lever: “D” position
Gear position: 1st Þ 2nd Gear (D/C ON/OFF)
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased
engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions
required for this test.
3. Perform step “2” again.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, then perform step “1” to “3” again.
SAT014K
5. Check “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-
II. If DTC (P1764) is detected, refer to AT-196, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If DTC (P1762) is detected, go to AT-191, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If DTC (P1845) is detected, go to AT-231, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”.

Revision; 2004 April AT-194 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1764 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION

Wiring Diagram — AT — D/CF ACS002FJ

AT

TCWT0118E

Revision; 2004 April AT-195 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1764 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION

TCM terminals and Data are reference value. Measured between each terminals 5, 14, 24 and 46 (TCM ground).
Terminal Wire
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color
When the solenoid valve is operating (1st gear or 5th
When More than 2V
Direct clutch sole- gear)
21 G vehicle
noid valve When the solenoid valve is not operating (2nd gear, 3rd
cruises 0V
gear, or 4th gear)
SEL2
22 P/B – –
(pressure switch 5)
40 Y/G DATA BIT1 – –

Diagnostic Procedure ACS004KJ

1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” or “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA
MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Accelerate vehicle in the “D” position (1st Þ 2nd gear), and con-
firm the ON/OFF actuation of the “ATF PRES SW 5”.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2. PCIA0067E

2. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND A/T UNIT ASSEMBLY HARNESS CONNECTOR
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect TCM connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and TCM connector.
Terminal No.
Item Connector No. Continuity
(Wire color)
TCM F103 21 (G)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes
F7 4 (G)
connector
TCM F103 22 (P/B)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes
F6 6 (P/B)
connector
TCM F104 40 (Y/G)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes
F6 2 (Y/G)
connector

4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.

5. Reinstall any part removed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.
SCIA3086E

Revision; 2004 April AT-196 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1764 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION

3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY A

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector B
and control valve assembly harness connector.
Item Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Continuity
AT
A/T unit assembly
F6 2 (R)
harness connector
Control valve assem- Yes
D
bly harness connec- F302 10 (R)
tor
A/T unit assembly
F6 6 (GY) E
harness connector
Control valve assem- Yes
bly harness connec- F302 14 (GY)
tor F
A/T unit assembly
F7 4 (W/B)
harness connector
Control valve assem- Yes G
bly harness connec- F301 7 (W/B)
tor

4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. H

5. Reinstall any part removed.
SCIA3085E
OK or NG
OK >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . I
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK DTC J

Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-194, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .

OK or NG K
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 5.

5. CHECK TCM L

1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. M
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision; 2004 April AT-197 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE PFP:31940

Description ACS002FL

High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP
switch, vehicle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will then
be shifted to the optimum position.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002FM

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “HLR/C SOL/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or P1767 without CONSULT-II is detected
under the following conditions.
– When TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve.
– When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value.
Possible Cause ACS002FN

● Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
● High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002FO

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine.
4. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 5
consecutive seconds.
ACCELE POS: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8
Selector lever: “D” position
Gear position: 2nd Þ 3rd Gear (HLR/C ON/OFF)
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased
engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions
required for this test. SAT014K

5. If DTC is detected, go to AT-200, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”.

Revision; 2004 April AT-198 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

Wiring Diagram — AT — HLR/C ACS002FP

AT

TCWT0119E

Revision; 2004 April AT-199 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

TCM terminal and Data are reference value. Measured between each terminals 5, 14, 24 and 46 (TCM ground).
Terminal Wire
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color
When the solenoid valve operating [6 km/h (4 MPH) or
High and low When More than 2V
faster in 1st gear or 2nd gear]
11 R/L reverse clutch vehicle
solenoid valve cruises When the solenoid valve is not operating [6 km/h (4 MPH)
0V
or slower in 1st gear or 3rd, 4th, or 5th gear]

Diagnostic Procedure ACS004KK

1. CHECK HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector at the trans-
mission right side.
3. Check the resistance between terminal and ground.

Connector Terminal No.

Solenoid valve Resistance (Approx.)
No. (Wire color)
High and low reverse
F7 3 (R/L) - Ground 3-9Ω
clutch solenoid valve
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. SCIA1843E
NG >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and control valve assembly harness connector.
Item Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Continuity
A/T unit assembly
F7 3 (B/W)
harness connector
Control valve assem- Yes
bly harness connec- F301 5 (B/W)
tor

4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG SCIA3087E

OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

3. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE

Check valve resistance
● Refer to AT-202, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .

Revision; 2004 April AT-200 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

4. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT A

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect TCM connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector B
and TCM connector.
Terminal No.
Item Connector No. Continuity AT
(Wire color)
TCM F103 11 (R/L)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes
F7 3 (R/L) D
connector
SCIA1844E
4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Reinstall any part removed. E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. F

5. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-198, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . G
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
H
NG >> GO TO 6.

6. CHECK TCM
I
1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG J
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
K

Revision; 2004 April AT-201 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

Component Inspection ACS004KL

HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

Resistance check
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
3. Disconnect control valve assembly harness connector.
4. Check resistance between terminal and ground.
Terminal No. Resistance (Ω)
Solenoid Valve Connector No.
(Wire color) (Approx.)
High and low reverse
F301 5 (R) - Ground 3-9Ω
clutch solenoid valve
5. If NG, replace control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control
Valve Assembly" .

SCIA3088E

Operation check
● Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
applying battery voltage to the terminal 5 and ground.

SCIA3089E

Revision; 2004 April AT-202 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1769 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION

DTC P1769 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION
PFP:31940 A
Description ACS002FR

● High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the B
PNP switch, vehicle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears
will then be shifted to the optimum position.
● This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but also by mechanical mal-
function such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation. AT

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002FS

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. D

● Diagnostic trouble code “HLR/C SOL FNCTN” with CONSULT-II or P1769 without CONSULT-II is
detected under the following conditions.
– When TCM detects that actual gear ratio is irregular, and relation between gear position and condition of E
ATF pressure switch 6 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
– When TCM detects that relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 6 is irregular
during releasing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change) F
Possible Cause ACS002FT

● Harness or connectors G
(The solenoid and switch circuits are open or shorted.)
● High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
● ATF pressure switch 6 H
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002FU

CAUTION:
I
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. J
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
K
1. Start engine.
2. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following condition.
ACCELE POS: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8
L
Selector lever: “D” position
Gear position: 2nd Þ 3rd Gear (HLR/C ON/OFF)
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased
engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions M
required for this test.
3. Perform step “2” again.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, then perform step “1” to “3” again.
SAT014K
5. Check “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-
II. If DTC (P1769) is detected, refer to AT-205, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If DTC (P1767) is detected, go to AT-200, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If DTC (P1846) is detected, go to AT-235, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”.

Revision; 2004 April AT-203 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1769 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION

Wiring Diagram — AT — HLR/CF ACS002FV

TCWT0120E

Revision; 2004 April AT-204 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1769 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION

TCM terminal and Data are reference value. Measured between each terminals 5,14,24 and 46 (TCM ground).
Terminal Wire A
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color
When the solenoid valve operating [6 km/h (4 MPH) or
More than 2V
High and low reverse faster in 1st gear or 2nd gear]
11 R/L B
clutch solenoid valve When When the solenoid valve is not operating [6 km/h (4 MPH)
vehicle 0V
or slower in 1st gear or 3rd, 4th, or 5th gear]
cruises
PSC2 When high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve “ON”. 0V AT
26 G/Y
(pressure switch 6) When high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve “OFF”. Battery voltage

Diagnostic Procedure ACS004KM

D
1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS (WITH CONSULT-II)
With CONSULT-II
E
1. Start engine.
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” or “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA
MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
F
3. Accelerate vehicle in the “D” position (2nd Þ 3rd gear), and con-
firm the ON/OFF actuation of the “ATF PRES SW 6”.
OK or NG
G
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 3.
H
PCIA0067E

2. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS (WITHOUT CONSULT-II) I

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Accelerate vehicle in the “D” position (2nd Þ 3rd gear). J

Connector Terminal No.

Solenoid valve Voltage
No. (Wire color) K
High and low reverse OFF Battery voltage
F104 26 (G/Y) - Ground
clutch solenoid valve ON Approx. 0 V
L
OK or NG
PCIA0068E
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 3.
M

Revision; 2004 April AT-205 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1769 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION

3. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND A/T UNIT ASSEMBLY HARNESS CONNECTOR
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect TCM connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and TCM connector.
Terminal No.
Item Connector No. Continuity
(Wire color)
TCM F103 11 (R/L)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes
F7 3 (R/L)
connector
TCM F104 26 (G/Y)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes
F6 4 (G/Y)
connector
4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Reinstall any part removed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.

SCIA3090E

4. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and control valve assembly harness connector.
Item Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Continuity
A/T unit assembly
F6 4 (Y)
harness connector
Control valve assem- Yes
bly harness connec- F302 11 (Y)
tor
A/T unit assembly
F7 3 (B/W)
harness connector
Control valve assem- Yes
bly harness connec- F301 5 (B/W)
tor

4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.

5. Reinstall any part removed.
OK or NG
OK >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294,
"Control Valve Assembly" .
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.
SCIA3091E

Revision; 2004 April AT-206 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1769 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION

5. CHECK DTC A
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-203, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END B
NG >> GO TO 6.

6. CHECK TCM AT

1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
D
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. E

Revision; 2004 April AT-207 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE

DTC P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE PFP:31940

Description ACS002FX

Low coast brake solenoid valve is turned “ON” or “OFF” by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP
switch, vehicle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will then
be shifted to the optimum position.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002FY

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or P1772 without CONSULT-II is
detected when TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve.
Possible Cause ACS002FZ

● Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
● Low coast brake solenoid valve
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002G0

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine.
4. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 5
consecutive seconds.
Selector lever: “M” position
Gear position: “M1-1st” or “M2-2nd” gear (LC/B ON/OFF)
5. If DTC is detected, go to AT-210, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SAT014K

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”.

Revision; 2004 April AT-208 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE

Wiring Diagram — AT — LC/B ACS002G1

AT

TCWT0121E

Revision; 2004 April AT-209 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE

TCM terminal and Data are reference value. Measured between each terminals 5, 14, 24 and 46 (TCM ground).
Terminal Wire
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color
When the solenoid valve is operating (when running in
When Battery voltage
Low coast brake M1-1 gear or M2-2 gear)
13 W/L vehicle
solenoid valve When the solenoid valve is not operating (when running in
cruises 0V
“D”)

Diagnostic Procedure ACS004KN

1. CHECK LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector at the trans-
mission right side.
3. Check the resistance between terminal and ground.

Terminal No.
Solenoid valve Connector No. Resistance (Approx.)
(Wire color)
Low coast brake
F7 2 (W/L) - Ground 20 - 40 Ω
solenoid valve
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. SCIA1835E
NG >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and control valve assembly harness connector.
Item Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Continuity
A/T unit assembly
F7 2 (B/R)
harness connector
Control valve assem- Yes
bly harness connec- F301 4 (B/R)
tor

4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG SCIA3092E

OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

3. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE

Check valve resistance
● Refer to AT-212, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .

Revision; 2004 April AT-210 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE

4. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT A

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect TCM connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector B
and TCM connector.
Terminal No.
Item Connector No. Continuity AT
(Wire color)
TCM F103 13 (W/L)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes
F7 2 (W/L) D
connector
SCIA1836E
4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Reinstall any part removed. E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. F

5. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-101, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . G
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
H
NG >> GO TO 6.

6. CHECK TCM
I
1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG J
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
K

Revision; 2004 April AT-211 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE

Component Inspection ACS004KO

LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE

Resistance check
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
3. Disconnect control valve assembly harness connector.
4. Check resistance between terminal and ground.
Terminal No. Resistance (Ω)
Solenoid Valve Connector No.
(Wire color) (Approx.)
Low coast brake sole-
F301 4 (W) - Ground 20 - 40 Ω
noid valve
5. If NG, replace control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control
Valve Assembly" .

SCIA3093E

Operation check
● Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
applying battery voltage to the terminal 4 and ground.

SCIA3094E

Revision; 2004 April AT-212 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1774 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION

DTC P1774 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION PFP:31940

A
Description ACS002G3

● Low coast brake solenoid valve is turned “ON” or “OFF” by the TCM in response to signals sent from the
PNP switch, vehicle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears B
will then be shifted to the optimum position.
● This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but also by mechanical mal-
function such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation. AT
On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002G4

● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

D
● Diagnostic trouble code “LC/B SOLENOID FNCT” with CONSULT-II or P1774 without CONSULT-II is
detected under the following conditions.
– When TCM detects that actual gear ratio is irregular, and relation between gear position and condition of
E
ATF pressure switch 2 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
– When TCM detects that relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 2 is irregular
during releasing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
F
Possible Cause ACS002G5

● Harness or connectors
(The solenoid and switch circuits are open or shorted.) G
● Low coast brake solenoid valve
● ATF Pressure switch 2
H
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002G6

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. I
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. J
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine. K
2. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following condition.
Selector lever: “M” position
Gear position: “M1-1st” or “M2-2nd” gear (LC/B ON/OFF) L
3. Perform step “2” again.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, then perform step “1” to “3” again.
5. Check “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT- M
II. If DTC (P1774) is detected, refer to AT-215, "Diagnostic Pro-
cedure" .
If DTC (P1772) is detected, go to AT-210, "Diagnostic Proce- SAT014K
dure" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”.

Revision; 2004 April AT-213 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1774 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION

Wiring Diagram — AT — LC/BF ACS002G7

TCWT0122E

Revision; 2004 April AT-214 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1774 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION

TCM terminals and Data are reference value. Measured between each terminals 5, 14, 24 and 46 (TCM ground).
Terminal Wire A
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color

When When the solenoid valve is operating (when running in M1-1

Low coast brake Battery voltage
13 W/L vehicle speed or M2-2 speed)
solenoid valve B
cruises When the solenoid valve is not operating (when running in “D”) 0V
SEL1 (pressure
16 W/G – –
switch 2) AT
40 Y/G DATA BIT1 – –

Diagnostic Procedure ACS004KP

D
1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS
With CONSULT-II
E
1. Start engine.
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” or “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA
MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
F
3. Accelerate vehicle in the manual mode (“M1-1st” or “M2-2nd”
gear), and confirm the ON/OFF actuation of the “ATF PRES SW
2”.
G
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
OK or NG H
OK >> GO TO 4. PCIA0067E

NG >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND A/T UNIT ASSEMBLY HARNESS CONNECTOR I

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect TCM connector. J
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and TCM connector.
K
Terminal No.
Item Connector No. Continuity
(Wire color)
TCM F103 13 (W/L)
L
A/T unit assembly harness Yes
F7 2 (W/L)
connector
TCM F103 16 (W/G)
M
A/T unit assembly harness Yes
F6 5 (W/G)
connector
TCM F104 40 (Y/G)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes
F6 2 (Y/G)
connector

4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.

5. Reinstall any part removed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.
SCIA3095E

Revision; 2004 April AT-215 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1774 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION

3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and control valve assembly harness connector.
Item Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Continuity
A/T unit assembly
F6 2 (R)
harness connector
Control valve assem- Yes
bly harness connec- F302 10 (R)
tor
A/T unit assembly
F6 5 (L)
harness connector
Control valve assem- Yes
bly harness connec- F302 13 (L)
tor
A/T unit assembly
F7 2 (B/R)
harness connector
Control valve assem- Yes
bly harness connec- F301 4 (B/R)
tor

4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.

5. Reinstall any part removed.
SCIA3096E
OK or NG
OK >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-101, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 5.

5. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision; 2004 April AT-216 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH

DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH PFP:34901

A
Description ACS002G9

Manual mode switch is installed in A/T device. It sends manual mode switch, shift up and shift down switch
signals to TCM. B
TCM sends the switch signals to combination meter. by CAN communication line. Then manual mode switch
position is indicated on the A/T indicator. For inspection, refer to AT-220, "Position Indicator Lamp" .
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ACS002GA AT
Monitor Item Condition Reference Value
Manual shift gate position (neutral) ON
MANU MODE SW [ON - OFF] D
Other than the above OFF
Manual shift gate position OFF
NON M-MODE SW [ON - OFF]
Other than the above ON E
Selector lever: + side ON
UP SW LEVER [ON - OFF]
Other than the above OFF
F
Selector lever: - side ON
DOWN SW LEVER [ON - OFF]
Other than the above OFF
G
On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002GB

● This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “MANU MODE SW/CIR” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM monitors Man- H
ual mode, Non manual mode, Up or Down switch signal, and detects as irregular when impossible input
pattern occurs 1 second or more.
Possible Cause ACS002GC I
● Harness or connectors
(These switches circuit is open or shorted.)
● Mode select switch (Built into A/T control device) J
● Position select switch (Built into A/T control device)
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002GD K
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. L
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) M
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Move selector lever to “M” position.
4. Start engine and drive vehicle for at least 2 consecutive sec-
onds.
5. If DTC is detected, go to AT-219, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SAT014K

Revision; 2004 April AT-217 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH

Wiring Diagram — AT — MMSW ACS002GE

TCWT0123E

Revision; 2004 April AT-218 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH

Diagnostic Procedure ACS002GF

1. CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITH CONSULT-II) A

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position. (Do not start engine.) B
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out ON/OFF switching action of the “MANU MODE SW”, AT
“NON M-MODE SW”, “UP SW LEVER”, “DOWN SW LEVER”.
OK or NG
D
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.

E
PCIA0064E

2. CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITHOUT CONSULT-II)

F
Without CONSULT-II
Drive vehicle in the manual mode, and confirm that the actual gear position and the meter's indication of the
position mutually coincide when the selector lever is shifted to the “+ (up)” or “- (down)” side (1st ⇔ 5th gear).
G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3. H
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following items. I
● Power supply. Refer to DI-4, "COMBINATION METERS" .
● Manual mode switch. Refer to AT-220, "Component Inspection" .
● Pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. J
● Open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connector for A/T device (manual mode
switch).
OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 4
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
L
4. CHECK DTC
Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to AT-217, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . M
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Replace the control device assembly. Refer to AT-283, "Control Device Removal and Installation"
.

Revision; 2004 April AT-219 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH

Component Inspection ACS002GG

MANUAL MODE SWITCH

Check continuity between terminals. Refer to AT-218, "Wiring Diagram — AT — MMSW" .
Item Position Connector No. Terminal No. (Unit side) Continuity
Auto 9 - 10
Manual mode (select) switch
Manual 6-9
M47 Yes
UP switch Up 8-9
DOWN switch Down 7-9

Position Indicator Lamp ACS002GH

DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS (WITH CONSULT-II)
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for A/T with
CONSULT-II and read out the value of “GEAR”.
3. Drive vehicle in the manual mode, and confirm that the actual
gear position and the meter's indication of the position mutually
coincide when the selector lever is shifted to the “+ (up)” or “-
(down)” side (1st ⇔ 5th gear).
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END PCIA0065E

NG >> Check the following items.

Position Indicator Lamp Symptom Chart
Items Presumed location of trouble
Manual mode switch
The actual gear position does not change, or shifting into the Refer to AT-217, "DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH" .
manual mode is not possible (no gear shifting in the manual mode A/T main system (Fail-safe function actuated)
possible).
The position indicator lamp is not indicated. ● Refer to AT-86, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH
CONSULT-II)" .
Execute the self-diagnosis function.
The actual gear position changes, but the position indicator lamp
is not indicated. ● Refer to AT-86, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH
CONSULT-II)" .
Execute the self-diagnosis function.
The actual gear position and the indication on the position indica-
tor lamp do not coincide. ● Refer to AT-86, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH
CONSULT-II)" .
Only a specific position or positions is/are not indicated on the Check the meter control unit.
position indicator lamp. Refer to DI-4, "COMBINATION METERS" .

Revision; 2004 April AT-220 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1

DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1 PFP:25240

A
Description ACS002GI

Fail-safe function to detect front brake clutch solenoid valve condition.

B
On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002GJ

● This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “ATF PRES SW 1/CIRC” with CONSULT-II is detected, when TCM detects that AT
actual gear ratio is normal, and relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 1 is
irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
Possible Cause ACS002GK D
● ATF pressure switch 1
● Harness or connectors
(The switch circuit is open or shorted.) E

DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002GL

CAUTION: F
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” G
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II H
1. Start engine.
2. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following condition.
ACCELE POS: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8 I
Selector lever: “D” position
Gear position: 3rd Þ 4th Gear (FR/B ON/OFF)
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased J
engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions
required for this test.
3. Perform step “2” again.
K
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, then perform step “1” to “3” again.
SAT014K
5. Check “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-
II.
L
If DTC (P1841) is detected, go to AT-223, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If DTC (P1757) is detected, go to AT-181, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

Revision; 2004 April AT-221 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1

Wiring Diagram — AT — FPSW1 ACS002GM

TCWT0124E

Revision; 2004 April AT-222 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1

TCM terminal and Data are reference value. Measured between each terminals 5, 14, 24 and 46 (TCM ground).
Terminal Wire A
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color
When When front brake solenoid valve “OFF”. Battery voltage
PSB2 (pressure
35 B/Y vehicle
switch 1) When front brake solenoid valve“ ON”. 0V B
starts

Diagnostic Procedure ACS004KQ

1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS (WITH CONSULT-II) AT

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine. D
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” or “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA
MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Accelerate vehicle in the “D” position (3rd Þ 4th gear), and con- E
firm the ON/OFF actuation of the “ATF PRES SW 1”.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. F
NG >> GO TO 3.

PCIA0067E G

2. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS (WITHOUT CONSULT-II)

H
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Accelerate vehicle in the “D” position (3rd Þ 4th gear). I
Connector Terminal No.
Solenoid valve Voltage
No. (Wire color)
OFF Battery voltage
J
Front brake solenoid
F104 35 (B/Y) - Ground
valve ON Approx. 0 V

OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 5. PCIA0066E

NG >> GO TO 3.
L
3. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect TCM connector. M
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and TCM connector.
Terminal No.
Item Connector No. Continuity
(Wire color)
TCM F104 35 (B/Y)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes
F6 3 (B/Y)
connector

4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.

5. Reinstall any part removed.
SCIA3097E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

Revision; 2004 April AT-223 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1

4. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and control valve assembly harness connector.
Item Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Continuity
A/T unit assembly
F6 3 (G)
harness connector
Control valve assem- Yes
bly harness connec- F302 12 (G)
tor
4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG SCIA3098E

OK >> Replace control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC confirmation procedure”. Refer to AT-101, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 6.

6. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> Replace control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision; 2004 April AT-224 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1843 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 3

DTC P1843 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 3 PFP:25240

A
Description ACS002GO

Fail-safe function to detect input clutch solenoid valve condition.

B
On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002GP

● This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “ATF PRES SW 3/CIRC” with CONSULT-II is detected, when TCM detects that AT
actual gear ratio is normal, and relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 3 is
irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
Possible Cause ACS002GQ D
● ATF pressure switch 3
● Harness or connectors
(The switch circuit is open or shorted.) E

DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002GR

CAUTION: F
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” G
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II H
1. Start engine.
2. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following condition.
ACCELE POS: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8 I
Selector lever: “D” position
Gear position: 3rd Þ 4th Gear (I/C ON/OFF)
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased J
engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions
required for this test.
3. Perform step “2” again.
K
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, then perform step “1” to “3” again.
SAT014K
5. Check “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-
II.
L
If DTC (P1843) is detected, go to AT-227, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If DTC (P1752) is detected, go to AT-172, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

Revision; 2004 April AT-225 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1843 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 3

Wiring Diagram — AT — FPSW3 ACS002GS

TCWT0125E

Revision; 2004 April AT-226 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1843 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 3

TCM terminals and Data are reference value. Measured between each terminals 5, 14, 24 and 46 (TCM ground).
Terminal Wire A
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color
SEL3
4 P/L – –
(pressure switch 3)
B
40 Y/G DATA BIT1 – –

Diagnostic Procedure ACS004KR

AT
1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS
With CONSULT-II
D
1. Start engine.
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” or “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA
MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
E
3. Accelerate vehicle in the “D” position (3rd Þ 4th gear), and con-
firm the ON/OFF actuation of the “ATF PRES SW 3”.
OK or NG
F
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.
G
PCIA0067E

2. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND A/T UNIT ASSEMBLY HARNESS CONNECTOR
H
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect TCM connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector I
and TCM connector.
Terminal No.
Item Connector No. Continuity J
(Wire color)
TCM F103 4 (P/L)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes
connector
F6 7 (P/L) K
TCM F104 40 (Y/G)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes
F6 2 (Y/G) SCIA3099E
L
connector

4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.

5. Reinstall any part removed. M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

Revision; 2004 April AT-227 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1843 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 3

3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and control valve assembly harness connector.
Item Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Continuity
A/T unit assembly
F6 2 (R)
harness connector
Control valve assem- Yes
bly harness connec- F302 10 (R)
tor
A/T unit assembly
F6 7 (W)
harness connector SCIA3100E

Control valve assem- Yes

bly harness connec- F302 15 (W)
tor
4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK DTC
Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to AT-101, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 5.

5. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision; 2004 April AT-228 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5

DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5 PFP:25240

A
Description ACS002GU

Fail-safe function to detect direct clutch solenoid valve condition.

B
On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002GV

● This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “ATF PRES SW 5/CIRC” with CONSULT-II is detected, when TCM detects that AT
actual gear ratio is normal, and relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 5 is
irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
Possible Cause ACS002GW D
● ATF pressure switch 5
● Harness or connectors
(The switch circuit is open or shorted.) E

DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002GX

CAUTION: F
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” G
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II H
1. Start engine.
2. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following condition.
ACCELE POS: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8 I
Selector lever: “D” position
Gear position: 1st Þ 2nd Gear (D/C ON/OFF)
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased J
engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions
required for this test.
3. Perform step “2” again.
K
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, then perform step “1” to “3” again.
SAT014K
5. Check “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-
II.
L
If DTC (P1845) is detected, go to AT-231, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If DTC (P1762) is detected, go to AT-191, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

Revision; 2004 April AT-229 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5

Wiring Diagram — AT — FPSW5 ACS002GY

TCWT0126E

Revision; 2004 April AT-230 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5

TCM terminals and Data are reference value. Measured between each terminals 5, 14, 24 and 46 (TCM ground).
Terminal Wire A
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color
SEL2
22 P/B – –
(pressure switch 5)
B
40 Y/G DATA BIT1 – –

Diagnostic Procedure ACS004KS

AT
1. INPUT SIGNALS
With CONSULT-II
D
1. Start engine.
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” or “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA
MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
E
3. Accelerate vehicle in the “D” position (1st Þ 2nd gear), and con-
firm the ON/OFF actuation of the “ATF PRES SW 5”.
OK or NG
F
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.
G
PCIA0067E

2. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND A/T UNIT ASSEMBLY HARNESS CONNECTOR
H
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect TCM connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector I
and TCM connector.
Terminal No.
Item Connector No. Continuity J
(Wire color)
TCM F103 22 (P/B)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes
connector
F6 6 (P/B) K
TCM F104 40 (Y/G)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes
F6 2 (Y/G) SCIA3101E
L
connector

4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.

5. Reinstall any part removed. M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

Revision; 2004 April AT-231 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5

3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and control valve assembly harness connector.
Item Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Continuity
A/T unit assembly
F6 2 (R)
harness connector
Control valve assem- Yes
bly harness connec- F302 10 (R)
tor
A/T unit assembly
F6 6 (GY)
harness connector SCIA3102E

Control valve assem- Yes

bly harness connec- F302 14 (GY)
tor
4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC confirmation procedure”. Refer to AT-101, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 3.

5. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer toAT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision; 2004 April AT-232 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1846 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 6

DTC P1846 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 6 PFP:25240

A
Description ACS002H0

Fail-safe function to detect high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve condition.
B
On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS002H1

● This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “ATF PRES SW 6/CIRC” with CONSULT-II is detected, when TCM detects that AT
actual gear ratio is normal, and relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 6 is
irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change)
Possible Cause ACS002H2 D
● ATF pressure switch 6
● Harness or connectors
(The switch circuit is open or shorted.) E

DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002H3

CAUTION: F
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” G
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II H
1. Start engine.
2. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following condition.
ACCELE POS: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8 I
Selector lever: “D” position
Gear position: 2nd Þ 3rd Gear (HLR/C ON/OFF)
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased J
engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions
required for this test.
3. Perform step “2” again.
K
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, then perform step “1” to “3” again.
SAT014K
5. Check “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-
II.
L
If DTC (P1846) is detected, go to AT-235, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If DTC (P1767) is detected, go to AT-200, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

Revision; 2004 April AT-233 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1846 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 6

Wiring Diagram — AT — FPSW6 ACS002H4

TCWT0127E

Revision; 2004 April AT-234 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1846 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 6

TCM terminal and Data are reference value. Measured between each terminals 5,14,24 and 46 (TCM ground).
Terminal Wire A
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color
When When high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve “ON”. 0V
PSC2
26 G/Y vehicle
(pressure switch 6) When high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve “OFF”. Battery voltage B
cruises

Diagnostic Procedure ACS004KT

1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS (WITH CONSULT-II) AT

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine. D
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” or “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA
MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Accelerate vehicle in the “D” position (2nd Þ 3rd gear), and con- E
firm the ON/OFF actuation of the “ATF PRES SW 6”.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. F
NG >> GO TO 3.

PCIA0067E G

2. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS (WITHOUT CONSULT-II)

H
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Accelerate vehicle in the “D” position (2nd Þ 3rd gear). I

Connector Terminal No.

Solenoid valve Voltage
No. (Wire color)
J
High and low reverse OFF Battery voltage
F104 26 (G/Y) - Ground
clutch solenoid valve ON Approx. 0 V

OK or NG K
PCIA0068E
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 3.
L
3. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
M
2. Disconnect TCM connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and TCM connector.
Terminal No.
Item Connector No. Continuity
(Wire color)
TCM F104 26 (G/Y)
A/T unit assembly harness Yes
F6 4 (G/Y)
connector

4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.

5. Reinstall any part removed.
SCIA3103E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

Revision; 2004 April AT-235 2003 G35 Coupe

 DTC P1846 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 6

4. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector
and control valve assembly harness connector.
Item Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Continuity
A/T unit assembly
F6 4 (Y)
harness connector
Control valve assem- Yes
bly harness connec- F302 11 (Y)
tor
4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG SCIA3104E

OK >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5. CHECK DTC
Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to AT-101, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 6.

6. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision; 2004 April AT-236 2003 G35 Coupe

 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION, MANUAL MODE, BRAKE AND THROTTLE POSI-
TION SWITCH CIRCUIT

PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION, MANUAL MODE, BRAKE AND THROTTLE POSI-

TION SWITCH CIRCUIT PFP:31918 A

Diagnostic Procedure ACS002H6

1. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT B

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) AT
2. Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T”
with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out “N·P”, “R” and “D” position switches moving selector D
lever to each position.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. E
NG >> GO TO 2.

PCIA0034E F

2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

Check the following items. G
● Disconnection or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and PNP switch 1, 2, 3, 4.
● Disconnection or short-circuit in the harness between the PNP switch 3 monitor and TCM.
H
● PNP switch. Refer to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. I
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

3. CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT

J
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for K
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out ON/OFF switching action of the “MANU MODE SW”,
“NON M-MODE SW”, “UP SW LEVER”, “DOWN SW LEVER”. L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4. M

PCIA0064E

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

Check the following items.
● Manual mode switch. Refer to AT-217, "DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH" .
● Check the connector housing for missing, loosening, bending or falling down of any terminal.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision; 2004 April AT-237 2003 G35 Coupe

 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION, MANUAL MODE, BRAKE AND THROTTLE POSI-
TION SWITCH CIRCUIT

5. CHECK BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out ON/OFF switching action of the “BRAKE SW”.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Check the following items.
● Brake switch. Refer to BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" .

● Combination meter. Refer to DI-4, "COMBINATION

METERS" .
PCIA0070E

6. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Depress accelerator pedal and read out the value of “CLSD THL
POS” and “W/O THL POS”.
Monitor item
Accelerator pedal operation
CLSD THL POS W/O THL POS
Released ON OFF
Fully depressed OFF ON PCIA0070E

4. Perform the self-diagnosis for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

7. CHECK DTC
Perform SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE.
● Refer to AT-86, "CONSULT-II" .
● CAN Communication Line. Refer to AT-98, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 8.

8. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision; 2004 April AT-238 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS PFP:00007

A
Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC ACS002H7

AT

TCWT0128E

Revision; 2004 April AT-239 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

TCWT0129E

Revision; 2004 April AT-240 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

TCM terminal and Data are reference value. Measured between each terminals 5, 14, 24 and 46 (TCM ground).
Terminal Wire A
Item Condition Data (Approx.)
No. color
6 L CAN-H – – –
7 R CAN-L – – – B
K-line
23 LG (CONSULT-II sig- The terminal is connected to the Data link connector for CONSULT-II.
nal) AT
BACK-UP LAMP Selector lever in “R” position. 0V
41 R IGN ON
relay Selector lever in other position. Battery voltage
D
A/T CHECK Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On ACS002H8

SYMPTOM:
A/T CHECK indicator lamp does not come on for about 2 seconds when turning ignition switch to E
“ON”.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE F

Execute the [Link] communication indicated in the results?

Do the self-diagnosis results indicate CAN communication? G
YES >> Check the CAN communication line. Refer to AT-98, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE"
.
NO >> GO TO 2. H

2. CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE

1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) I
2. Check voltage between TCM connector terminals and ground.
Refer to AT-133, "Wiring Diagram — AT — POWER" .
J
Terminal No.
Item Connector No. Voltage
(Wire color)
F103 9 (R/W) - Ground K
TCM 33 (Y/R) - Ground Battery voltage
F104
42 (Y/R) - Ground
L
3. Turn ignition switch OFF.
4. Check voltage between TCM connector terminals and ground. SCIA1672E

Refer to AT-133, "Wiring Diagram — AT — POWER" .

M
Terminal No.
Item Connector No. Voltage
(Wire color)
F103 9 (R/W) - Ground Battery voltage
TCM 33 (Y/R) - Ground
F104 0V
42 (Y/R) - Ground

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.

Revision; 2004 April AT-241 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

Check the following items:
● Harness for short or open between battery and TCM terminal 9
● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and TCM terminals 2,3,33 and 42
● 15A fuse [No.34, located in the fuse and fusible link block (J/B)] and 10A fuse (No.71, located in the IPDM
E/R)
● Ignition switch; Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
● A/T PV IGN relay; Refer to AT-137, "Component Inspection" .
● ECM realy; Refer to EC-133, "POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM" .
● Harness for short or open between IPDM E/R terminal 33 and A/T PV IGN relay terminal 2
● Harness for short or open between A/T PV IGN relay terminal 1 and ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

4. CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch to OFF.
2. Disconnect the TCM connector.
3. Check continuity between terminals 5 (B), 14 (B), 24 (B), 46 (B)
and ground. Refer to AT-133, "Wiring Diagram — AT —
POWER" .
4. If OK, check the harness for short-circuit to ground or the power
source.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair the short-circuit(s) in the harness or connector to
ground or the power source.
SCIA1161E

5. CHECK A/T CHECK INDICATOR LAMP CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch to OFF.
2. Check the combination meter.
Refer to DI-4, "COMBINATION METERS" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace the combination meter. Refer to DI-23, "Removal and Installation for Combination Meter"
.

6. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 7.

7. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision; 2004 April AT-242 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” or “N” Position ACS002H9

SYMPTOM: A
● Engine cannot be started with selector lever in “P” or “N” position.
● Engine can be started with selector lever in “D”or “R” position.
B
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT
AT
Execute self-diagnosis.
Do the self-diagnosis results indicate PNP switch?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION D
SWITCH" .
NO >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE E

Check the control linkage.

● Refer to AT-284, "Checking of A/T Position" . F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-284, "Adjustment of G
A/T Position" .

SCIA1904E

I
3. CHECK STARTING SYSTEM
Check starting system. Refer to SC-10, "STARTING SYSTEM" .
J
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
K
In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves When Pushed ACS002HA

SYMPTOM:
Even though the selector lever is set in the “P” position, the parking mechanism is not actuated, L
allowing the vehicle to be moved when it is pushed.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
M
1. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT
Execute self-diagnosis.
Do the self-diagnosis results indicate PNP switch?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION
SWITCH" .
NO >> GO TO 2.

Revision; 2004 April AT-243 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

2. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE

Check the control linkage.
● Refer to AT-284, "Checking of A/T Position" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-284, "Adjustment of
A/T Position" .

SCIA1904E

3. CHECK PARKING COMPONENTS

Check parking components. Refer to AT-301, "Parking Components" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision; 2004 April AT-244 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves ACS004J0

SYMPTOM: A
Vehicle moves forward or backward when selecting “N” position.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE B
1. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT
Execute self-diagnosis. AT
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate PNP switch?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION
SWITCH" . D
NO >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE E

Check the control linkage.
● Refer to AT-284, "Checking of A/T Position" .
OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-284, "Adjustment of
A/T Position" . G

H
SCIA1904E

3. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL I

Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
J
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Refill ATF.

SAT638A

4. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION M

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .

2. Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition
Check" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged,
repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60, "Symp-
tom Chart" .

SAT171B

Revision; 2004 April AT-245 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

5. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 6.

6. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Large Shock (“N” to “D” Position) ACS004J1

SYMPTOM:
A noticeable shock occurs when the selector lever is shifted from the “N” to “D” position.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Execute self-diagnosis.
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate A/T fluid temperature sensor, engine speed signal, accelerator pedal
position sensor, ATF pressure switch 1, front brake solenoid valve, CAN communication line?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-146, "DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE
SENSOR CIRCUIT" , AT-115, "DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL" , AT-144, "DTC P1705
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR" , AT-221, "DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1" , AT-179,
"DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-98, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION
LINE" .
NO >> GO TO 2.

2. ENGINE IDLE SPEED

Check the engine idle speed. Refer to EC-34, "Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair.

3. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE

Check the control linkage.
● Refer to AT-284, "Checking of A/T Position" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-284, "Adjustment of
A/T Position" .

SCIA1904E

Revision; 2004 April AT-246 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

4. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL A

Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. B
NG >> Refill ATF.

AT

D
SAT638A

5. CHECK LINE PRESSURE E

Check line pressure at idle with selector lever in “D” position. Refer
to AT-51, "LINE PRESSURE TEST" .
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG - 1 >> Line pressure high: GO TO 6.
NG - 2 >> Line pressure low: GO TO 7. G

SAT494G

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM I

1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .

2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" . J
3. Check the following items:
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-334, "Oil Pump" .
OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
L
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . M
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following items:
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-334, "Oil Pump" .
– Power train system. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" .
– Transmission case. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision; 2004 April AT-247 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

8. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition
Check" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 9.

SAT171B

9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60,
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

10. CHECK SYMPTOM

Check again.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 11.

11. CHECK TCM

1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision; 2004 April AT-248 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position ACS004J2

SYMPTOM: A
The vehicle does not creep in the “R” position. Or an extreme lack of acceleration is observed.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE B
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Execute self-diagnosis. AT
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate accelerator pedal position sensor, ATF pressure switch 6, high and low
reverse clutch solenoid valve, CAN communication line, PNP switch?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-144, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SEN- D
SOR" , AT-233, "DTC P1846 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 6" , AT-198, "DTC P1767 HIGH AND
LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-98, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION
LINE" , AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" .
NO >> GO TO 2. E

2. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE

F
Check the control linkage.
● Refer to AT-284, "Checking of A/T Position" .
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-284, "Adjustment of
A/T Position" .
H

I
SCIA1904E

3. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL J

Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. K
NG >> Refill ATF.

M
SAT638A

4. CHECK STALL TEST

Check stall revolution with selector lever in “M” and “R” positions.
Refer to AT-50, "STALL TEST" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
OK in “M” position, NG in “R” position>>[Link] A/T. Refer
to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" .
2. Check the following items. If any items are damaged,
repair or replace damaged parts.
– Reverse brake

NG in both “M” and “R” positions>>GO TO 7.

SAT493G

Revision; 2004 April AT-249 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

5. CHECK LINE PRESSURE

Check the line pressure with the engine idling. Refer to AT-51, "LINE
PRESSURE TEST" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG - 1 >> Line pressure high. GO TO 6.
NG - 2 >> Line pressure low. GO TO 7.

SAT494G

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following items:
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-334, "Oil Pump" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following items:
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-334, "Oil Pump" .
– Power train system. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" .
– Transmission case. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

8. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition
Check" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 12.

SAT171B

Revision; 2004 April AT-250 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM A

● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60,
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG B
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
AT
10. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
D
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 11.
E
11. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . F
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END G
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

12. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM H

● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60,
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
J
Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position ACS004J3

SYMPTOM:
Vehicle does not creep forward when selecting “D” position. K
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS L
Execute self-diagnosis.
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate accelerator pedal position sensor, CAN communication line, PNP
switch? M
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-144, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SEN-
SOR" , AT-98, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" , AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEU-
TRAL POSITION SWITCH" .
NO >> GO TO 2.

Revision; 2004 April AT-251 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

2. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE

Check the control linkage.
● Refer to AT-284, "Checking of A/T Position" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-284, "Adjustment of
A/T Position" .

SCIA1904E

3. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL

Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Refill ATF.

SAT638A

4. CHECK STALL TEST

Check stall revolution with selector lever in “D” position. Refer to AT-
50, "STALL TEST" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 7.

SAT493G

5. CHECK LINE PRESSURE

Check line pressure at idle with selector lever in “D” position. Refer
to AT-51, "LINE PRESSURE TEST" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG - 1 >> Line pressure high. GO TO 6.
NG - 2 >> Line pressure low. GO TO 7.

SAT494G

Revision; 2004 April AT-252 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM A

1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following items: B
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-334, "Oil Pump" .
OK or NG
AT
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM D

1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .

2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" . E
3. Check the following items:
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-334, "Oil Pump" .
– Power train system. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" . F
– Transmission case. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
G
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

8. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION H

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .

2. Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition I
Check" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. J
NG >> GO TO 12.

SAT171B L

9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60, M
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

10. CHECK SYMPTOM

Check again.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 11.

Revision; 2004 April AT-253 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

11. CHECK TCM

1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

12. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60,
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision; 2004 April AT-254 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 ACS004J4

SYMPTOM: A
Vehicle cannot be started from D1 on cruise test - Part 1.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE B
1. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Check if vehicle creeps in “R” position. AT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Refer to AT-249, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position" . D
2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Execute self-diagnosis. E
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic results?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system.
NO >> GO TO 3. F

3. CHECK ACCELERATOR POSITION (APP) SENSOR

G
Check accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor. Refer to AT-144, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SEN-
SOR"
OK or NG
H
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor.

4. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL I

Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" .

OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Refill ATF.
K

SAT638A

M
5. CHECK LINE PRESSURE
Check line pressure at the engine stall point. Refer to AT-51, "LINE
PRESSURE TEST" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG - 1 >> Line pressure high. GO TO 6.
NG - 2 >> Line pressure low. GO TO 7.

SAT494G

Revision; 2004 April AT-255 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following items:
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-334, "Oil Pump" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following items:
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-334, "Oil Pump" .
– Power train system. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" .
– Transmission case. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

8. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition
Check" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 12.

SAT171B

9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60,
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

10. CHECK SYMPTOM

Check again.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 11.

Revision; 2004 April AT-256 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

11. CHECK TCM A

1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG B
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
AT
12. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60,
D
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. E
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 ACS004J5

SYMPTOM: F
The vehicle does not shift-up from the D1 to D2 gear at the specified speed.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
G
1. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Check if vehicle creeps forward in “D” position” and vehicle can be started from D1.
H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Refer to AT-251, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position" , AT-255, "Vehicle Cannot Be
Started From D1" . I

2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS

J
Execute self-diagnosis.
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate ATF pressure switch 5, direct clutch solenoid valve, accelerator pedal
position sensor, vehicle speed sensor A/T (revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor MTR? K
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-229, "DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5" ,
AT-189, "DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-144, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE
POSITION SENSOR" , AT-110, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION
L
SENSOR)" , AT-157, "DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR" .
NO >> GO TO 3.

3. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL M

Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" .

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Refill ATF.

SAT638A

Revision; 2004 April AT-257 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

4. CHECK LINE PRESSURE

Check line pressure at the engine stall point. Refer to AT-51, "LINE
PRESSURE TEST" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG - 1 >> Line pressure high. GO TO 5.
NG - 2 >> Line pressure low. GO TO 6.

SAT494G

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following items:
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-334, "Oil Pump" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following items:
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-334, "Oil Pump" .
– Power train system. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" .
– Transmission case. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

7. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition
Check" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 11.

SAT171B

Revision; 2004 April AT-258 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM A

● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60,
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG B
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
AT
9. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
D
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 10.
E
10. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . F
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END G
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM H

● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60,
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
J
A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3 ACS004J6

SYMPTOM:
The vehicle does not shift-up from D2 to D3 gear at the specified speed. K
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM L
Check if vehicle creeps forward in “D” position” and vehicle can be started from D1.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. M
NG >> Refer to AT-251, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position" , AT-255, "Vehicle Cannot Be
Started From D1" .

2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS

Execute self-diagnosis.
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate ATF pressure switch 6, high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve,
accelerator pedal position sensor, vehicle speed sensor A/T (revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor
MTR?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-233, "DTC P1846 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 6" ,
AT-198, "DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-144, "DTC
P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR" , AT-110, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T
(REVOLUTION SENSOR)" , AT-157, "DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR" .
NO >> GO TO 3.

Revision; 2004 April AT-259 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

3. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL

Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Refill ATF.

SAT638A

4. CHECK LINE PRESSURE

Check line pressure at the engine stall point. Refer to AT-51, "LINE
PRESSURE TEST" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG - 1 >> Line pressure high. GO TO 5.
NG - 2 >> Line pressure low. GO TO 6.

SAT494G

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following items:
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-334, "Oil Pump" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following items:
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-334, "Oil Pump" .
– Power train system. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" .
– Transmission case. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision; 2004 April AT-260 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

7. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION A

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition
Check" . B
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 11. AT

SAT171B
E
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60,
F
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. G
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

9. CHECK SYMPTOM
H
Check again.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END I
NG >> GO TO 10.

10. CHECK TCM J

1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
K
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
L
11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60, M
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision; 2004 April AT-261 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4 ACS004J7

SYMPTOM:
● The vehicle does not shift-up from the D3 to D4 gear at the specified speed.
● The vehicle does not shift-up from the D3 to D4 gear unless A/T is warmed up.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Check if vehicle creeps forward in “D” position” and vehicle can be started from D1.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Refer to AT-251, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position" , AT-255, "Vehicle Cannot Be
Started From D1" .

2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS

Execute self-diagnosis.
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate ATF pressure switch 1, ATF pressure switch 3, front brake solenoid
valve, input clutch solenoid valve, accelerator pedal position sensor, vehicle speed sensor A/T (revolution sen-
sor) and vehicle speed sensor MTR?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-221, "DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1" ,
AT-225, "DTC P1843 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 3" , AT-170, "DTC P1752 INPUT CLUTCH
SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-179, "DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-144, "DTC
P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR" , AT-110, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T
(REVOLUTION SENSOR)" , AT-157, "DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR" .
NO >> GO TO 3.

3. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL

Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Refill ATF.

SAT638A

4. CHECK LINE PRESSURE

Check line pressure at the engine stall point. Refer to AT-51, "LINE
PRESSURE TEST" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG - 1 >> Line pressure high. GO TO 5.
NG - 2 >> Line pressure low. GO TO 6.

SAT494G

Revision; 2004 April AT-262 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM A

1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following items: B
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-334, "Oil Pump" .
OK or NG
AT
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM D

1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .

2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" . E
3. Check the following items:
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-334, "Oil Pump" .
– Power train system. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" . F
– Transmission case. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
G
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

7. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION H

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .

2. Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition I
Check" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. J
NG >> GO TO 11.

SAT171B L

8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60, M
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

9. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 10.

Revision; 2004 April AT-263 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

10. CHECK TCM

1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60,
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D5 ACS004J8

SYMPTOM:
● The vehicle does not shift-up from the D4 to D5 gear at the specified speed.
● The vehicle does not shift-up from the D4 to D5 gear unless A/T is warmed up.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Check if vehicle creeps forward in “D” position” and vehicle can be started from D1.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Refer to AT-251, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position" , AT-255, "Vehicle Cannot Be
Started From D1" .

2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS

Execute self-diagnosis.
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate ATF pressure switch 1, ATF pressure switch 5, front brake solenoid
valve, direct clutch solenoid valve, accelerator pedal position sensor, turbine revolution sensor, vehicle speed
sensor A/T (revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor MTR?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-221, "DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1" ,
AT-229, "DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5" , AT-179, "DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE
SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-189, "DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-144,
"DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR" , AT-152, "DTC P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION
SENSOR" , AT-110, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)" ,
AT-157, "DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR" .
NO >> GO TO 3.

3. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL

Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Refill ATF.

SAT638A

Revision; 2004 April AT-264 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

4. CHECK LINE PRESSURE A

Check line pressure at the engine stall point. Refer to AT-51, "LINE
PRESSURE TEST" .
OK or NG B
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG - 1 >> Line pressure high. GO TO 5.
NG - 2 >> Line pressure low. GO TO 6. AT

D
SAT494G

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM E

1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .

2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" .
F
3. Check the following items:
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-334, "Oil Pump" .
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
H
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" . I
3. Check the following items:
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-334, "Oil Pump" .
J
– Power train system. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" .
– Transmission case. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
L
7. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition M
Check" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 11.

SAT171B

Revision; 2004 April AT-265 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60,
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

9. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 10.

10. CHECK TCM

1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60,
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
A/T Does Not Perform Lock-Up ACS004J9

SYMPTOM:
A/T does not perform lock-up at the specified speed.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Execute self-diagnosis.
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate torque converter clutch solenoid valve, engine speed signal, turbine rev-
olution sensor, accelerator pedal position sensor, CAN communication?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-117, "DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER
CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-115, "DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL" , AT-152, "DTC
P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR" , AT-144, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SEN-
SOR" , AT-98, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
NO >> GO TO 2.

Revision; 2004 April AT-266 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL A

Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. B
NG >> Refill ATF.

AT

D
SAT638A

3. CHECK LINE PRESSURE E

Check line pressure at the engine stall point. Refer to AT-51, "LINE
PRESSURE TEST" .
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG - 1 >> Line pressure high. GO TO 4.
NG - 2 >> Line pressure low. GO TO 5. G

SAT494G

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM I

1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .

2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" . J
3. Check the following items:
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-334, "Oil Pump" .
OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
L
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . M
2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" .
3. Check the following items:
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-334, "Oil Pump" .
– Power train system. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" .
– Transmission case. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision; 2004 April AT-267 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

6. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition
Check" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 10.

SAT171B

7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60,
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

8. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 9.

9. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

10. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60,
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision; 2004 April AT-268 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

A/T Does Not Hold Lock-Up Condition ACS004JA

SYMPTOM: A
The lock-up condition cannot be maintained for more than 30 seconds.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE B
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Execute self-diagnosis. AT
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate torque converter clutch solenoid valve, engine speed signal, turbine rev-
olution sensor, CAN communication?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-117, "DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER D
CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-115, "DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL" , AT-152, "DTC
P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR" , AT-98, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE"
.
NO >> GO TO 2. E

2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL

F
Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. G
NG >> Refill ATF.

I
SAT638A

3. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION J

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition
Check" . K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 7. L

SAT171B

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60,
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

5. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 6.
Revision; 2004 April AT-269 2003 G35 Coupe
 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

6. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60,
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Lock-Up Is Not Released ACS004JB

SYMPTOM:
The lock-up condition cannot be cancelled even after releasing the accelerator pedal.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Execute self-diagnosis.
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate torque converter clutch solenoid valve, engine speed signal, turbine rev-
olution sensor, CAN communication?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-117, "DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER
CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-115, "DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL" , AT-152, "DTC
P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR" , AT-98, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE"
.
NO >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 3.

3. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision; 2004 April AT-270 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle ACS004JC

SYMPTOM: A
When a shift-down is performed, the engine speed does not smoothly return to the idling speed.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE B
1. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" . AT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Refill ATF. D

SAT638A
F
2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Execute self-diagnosis. G
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate front brake solenoid valve, direct clutch solenoid valve, ATF pressure
switch 1, ATF pressure switch 5, accelerator pedal position sensor, vehicle speed sensor A/T (revolution sen-
sor) and vehicle speed sensor MTR? H
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-179, "DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID
VALVE" , AT-189, "DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-221, "DTC P1841 ATF
PRESSURE SWITCH 1" , AT-229, "DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5" , AT-144, "DTC I
P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR" , AT-110, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T
(REVOLUTION SENSOR)" , AT-157, "DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR" .
NO >> GO TO 3.
J
3. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . K
2. Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition
Check" .
OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 7.
M

SAT171B

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60,
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision; 2004 April AT-271 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

5. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 6.

6. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60,
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Cannot Be Changed to Manual Mode ACS004JD

SYMPTOM:
Does not change to manual mode when manual shift gate is used.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. MANUAL MODE SWITCH
Check the manual mode switch. Refer to AT-217, "DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS

Execute self-diagnosis.
Do the self-diagnosis results indicate turbine revolution sensor?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-152, "DTC P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SEN-
SOR" .
NO >> INSPECTION END

Revision; 2004 April AT-272 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

A/T Does Not Shift: 5th Gear → 4th Gear ACS004JE

SYMPTOM: A
When shifted from 5M to 4M position in manual mode, does not downshift from 5th to 4th gear.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE B
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Execute self-diagnosis. AT
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate PNP switch, ATF pressure switch 1?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION
SWITCH" , AT-221, "DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1" . D
NO >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL E

Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. F
NG >> Refill ATF.

H
SAT638A

3. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE I

Check the control linkage.
● Refer to AT-284, "Checking of A/T Position" .
J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-284, "Adjustment of
K
A/T Position" .

SCIA1904E

4. MANUAL MODE SWITCH M

Check the manual mode switch. Refer to AT-217, "DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision; 2004 April AT-273 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

5. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition
Check" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 9.

SAT171B

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60,
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

7. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 8.

8. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60,
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision; 2004 April AT-274 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

A/T Does Not Shift: 4th Gear → 3rd Gear ACS004JF

SYMPTOM: A
When shifted from 4M to 3M position in manual mode, does not downshift from 4th to 3rd gear.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE B
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Execute self-diagnosis. AT
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate PNP switch, ATF pressure switch 1, ATF pressure switch 3?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION
SWITCH" , AT-221, "DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1" , AT-225, "DTC P1843 ATF PRES- D
SURE SWITCH 3" .
NO >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL E

Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" .

OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Refill ATF.
G

SAT638A

I
3. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE
Check the control linkage.
● Refer to AT-284, "Checking of A/T Position" . J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
K
NG >> Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-284, "Adjustment of
A/T Position" .

SCIA1904E
M
4. MANUAL MODE SWITCH
Check the manual mode switch. Refer to AT-217, "DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision; 2004 April AT-275 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

5. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition
Check" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 9.

SAT171B

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60,
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

7. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 8.

8. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60,
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision; 2004 April AT-276 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

A/T Does Not Shift: 3rd Gear → 2nd Gear ACS004JG

SYMPTOM: A
When shifted from 3M to 2M position in manual mode, does not downshift from 3rd to 2nd gear.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE B
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Execute self-diagnosis. AT
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate PNP switch, ATF pressure switch 6?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION
SWITCH" , AT-233, "DTC P1846 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 6" . D
NO >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL E

Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. F
NG >> Refill ATF.

H
SAT638A

3. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE I

Check the control linkage.
● Refer to AT-284, "Checking of A/T Position" .
J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-284, "Adjustment of
K
A/T Position" .

SCIA1904E

4. MANUAL MODE SWITCH M

Check the manual mode switch. Refer to AT-217, "DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision; 2004 April AT-277 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

5. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition
Check" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 9.

SAT171B

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60,
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

7. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 8.

8. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60,
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision; 2004 April AT-278 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

A/T Does Not Shift: 2nd Gear → 1st Gear ACS004JH

SYMPTOM: A
When shifted from 2M to 1M position in manual mode, does not downshift from 2nd to 1st gear.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE B
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Execute self-diagnosis. AT
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate PNP switch, ATF pressure switch 5?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION
SWITCH" , AT-229, "DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5" . D
NO >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL E

Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. F
NG >> Refill ATF.

H
SAT638A

3. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE I

Check the control linkage.
● Refer to AT-284, "Checking of A/T Position" .
J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-284, "Adjustment of
K
A/T Position" .

SCIA1904E

4. MANUAL MODE SWITCH M

Check the manual mode switch. Refer to AT-217, "DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision; 2004 April AT-279 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

5. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition
Check" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 9.

SAT171B

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60,
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

7. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 8.

8. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60,
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision; 2004 April AT-280 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake ACS004JI

SYMPTOM: A
No engine brake is applied when the gear is shifted from the 2nd to 1st gear.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE B
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Execute self-diagnosis. AT
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate PNP switch, ATF pressure switch 5?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION
SWITCH" , AT-229, "DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5" . D
NO >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL E

Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. F
NG >> Refill ATF.

H
SAT638A

3. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE I

Check the control linkage.
● Refer to AT-284, "Checking of A/T Position" .
J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-284, "Adjustment of
K
A/T Position" .

SCIA1904E

4. MANUAL MODE SWITCH M

Check the manual mode switch. Refer to AT-217, "DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision; 2004 April AT-281 2003 G35 Coupe

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

5. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition
Check" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 9.

SAT171B

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60,
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

7. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 8.

8. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

● Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60,
"Symptom Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision; 2004 April AT-282 2003 G35 Coupe

 SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM

SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM PFP:34901

A
Control Device Removal and Installation ACS002HV

AT

SCIA1797E M
1. Selector lever knob 2. Knob cover 3. Lock pin
4. Control device assembly 5. A/T device harness connector 6. Shift lock solenoid and park posi-
tion switch assembly
7. Snap pin 8. Conical washer 9. Plain washer
10. Pivot pin 11. Control rod 12. Dust cover
13. Dust cover plate

Revision; 2004 April AT-283 2003 G35 Coupe

 SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM

REMOVAL
1. Disconnect lower lever of control device and control rod.
2. Remove knob cover below selector lever knob downward.
3. Pull lock pin out of selector lever knob.
4. Remove selector lever knob.
5. Remove console finisher.
● Refer to IP-10, "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY" .

6. Remove center console.

● Refer to IP-10, "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY" .

7. Remove key interlock cable from control device assembly.

● Refer to AT-291, "KEY INTERLOCK CABLE" .
SCIA4962E

8. Disconnect A/T device harness connector.

9. Remove control device assembly.
INSTALLATION
Install in reverse order of removal. Be careful of the following:
● After installation is completed, adjust and check A/T position.
Adjustment of A/T Position ACS002HW

1. Loosen nut of pivot pin.

2. Place PNP switch and selector lever in “P” position.
3. While pressing lower lever toward rear of vehicle (in “P” position
direction), tighten nut to specified torque.

: 23.0 - 29.4 N·m (2.4 - 2.9 kg-m, 17 - 21 ft-lb)

SCIA1904E

Checking of A/T Position ACS002HX

1. Place selector lever in “P” position, and turn ignition switch ON (engine stop).
2. Check that selector lever can be shifted to other than “P” position when brake pedal is depressed. Also
check that selector lever can be shifted from “P” position only when brake pedal is depressed.
3. Move the selector lever and check for excessive effort, sticking, noise or rattle.
4. Confirm the selector lever stops at each position with the feel of engagement when it is moved through all
the positions. Check whether or not the actual position the selector lever is in matches the position shown
by the shift position indicator and the transmission body.
5. The method of operating the lever to individual positions cor-
rectly should be as shown in the figure.
6. When select button is pressed in “P”, “R”, or “N” position without
applying forward/backward force to selector lever, check button
operation for sticking.
7. Confirm the back-up lamps illuminate only when lever is placed
in the “R” position. Confirm the back-up lamps does not illumi-
nate when selector lever is in the “P” or “N” position with the
lever pushed against the “R” position.
8. Confirm the engine can only be started with the selector lever in
the “P” and “N” positions. And confirm that the engine can be SCIA3906E

started when the selector lever is being moved back and front in
the “P” position.
9. Check that transmission is locked completely in “P” position.
10. When selector lever is set to manual shift gate, check that manual mode is displayed on combination
meter.

Revision; 2004 April AT-284 2003 G35 Coupe

 SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM

Shift selector lever to “+” and “-” sides, and check that set shift position changes. (Only while a car is oper-
ating) A

AT

Revision; 2004 April AT-285 2003 G35 Coupe

 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM

A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM PFP:34950

Description ACS002HY

● The mechanical key interlock mechanism also operates as a shift lock:

With the ignition switch turned to ON, the selector lever cannot be shifted from “P” (parking) to any other
position unless the brake pedal is depressed.
With the key removed, the selector lever cannot be shifted from “P” to any other position.
The key cannot be removed unless the selector lever is placed in “P”.
● The shift lock and key interlock mechanisms are controlled by the ON-OFF operation of the shift lock sole-
noid and by the operation of the rotator and slider located inside the key cylinder.
Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location ACS002HZ

SCIA1799E

Revision; 2004 April AT-286 2003 G35 Coupe

 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM

Wiring Diagram — AT — SHIFT ACS002I0

AT

TCWT0130E

Revision; 2004 April AT-287 2003 G35 Coupe

 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM

Diagnostic Procedure ACS002I1

SYMPTOM 1:
● Selector lever cannot be moved from “P” position with key in ON position and brake pedal
applied.
● Selector lever can be moved from “P” position with key in ON position and brake pedal released.
● Selector lever can be moved from “P” position when key is removed from key cylinder.
SYMPTOM 2:
● Ignition key cannot be removed when selector lever is set to “P” position.
● Ignition key can be removed when selector lever is set to any position except “P”.

1. CHECK KEY INTERLOCK CABLE

Check key interlock cable for damage.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace key interlock cable. Refer to AT-291, "KEY INTERLOCK CABLE" .

2. CHECK SELECTOR LEVER POSITION

Check selector lever position for damage.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Check selector lever. Refer to AT-284, "Adjustment of A/T Position" .

3. CHECK POWER SOURCE

1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Check the voltage between stop lamp switch connector E124
terminal 3 (Y/G) and ground.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.

SCIA1794E

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

Check the following items:
1. Harness for short or open between ignition switch and stop lamp switch terminal 3
2. 10A fuse [No.12, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
3. Ignition switch. Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision; 2004 April AT-288 2003 G35 Coupe

 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM

5. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH A

Check continuity between stop lamp switch connector E124 terminals 3 (Y/G) and 4 (G).

AT

SCIA1796E

Check stop lamp switch after adjusting brake pedal — refer to BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" . E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. F

6. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT

G
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect A/T device harness connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T device harness connector M47 H
terminal 1 (B) and ground.
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. I
4. Connect A/T device connector.
OK or NG
J
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.
SCIA1902E K

7. CHECK SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID AND PARK POSITION SWITCH

1. Connect A/T device harness connector. L
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Selector lever is set in “P” position.
M
4. Check sift lock solenoid and park position switch operation.
Condition Brake pedal Operation
When ignition switch is turned to Depressed
“ON” position and selector lever Yes
is set in “P” position. Released

OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 8.

Revision; 2004 April AT-289 2003 G35 Coupe

 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM

8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

Check the following items:
● Harness for short or open between stop lamp switch connector E124 terminal 4 (G) and A/T device har-
ness connector M47 terminal 2 (G).
OK or NG
OK >> Replace shift lock solenoid or park position switch.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision; 2004 April AT-290 2003 G35 Coupe

 KEY INTERLOCK CABLE

KEY INTERLOCK CABLE PFP:34908

A
Components ACS002I6

AT

SCIA1800E
M
CAUTION:
● Install key interlock cable in such a way that it will not be damaged by sharp bends, twists or inter-
ference with adjacent parts.
● After installing key interlock cable to control device, make sure that casing cap and bracket are
firmly secured in their positions. If casing cap be removed with an external load of less than 39.2 N
(4.0 kg, 8.8 lb), replace key interlock cable with new one.

Revision; 2004 April AT-291 2003 G35 Coupe

 KEY INTERLOCK CABLE

Removal ACS002I7

1. Unlock slider by squeezing lock tabs on slider from adjuster

holder.
2. Remove casing cap from bracket of control device and remove
interlock rod from key interlock cable.

SCIA1230E

3. Remove holder from key cylinder and remove key interlock

cable.

SCIA1231E

Revision; 2004 April AT-292 2003 G35 Coupe

 KEY INTERLOCK CABLE

Installation ACS002I8

A
1. Set key interlock cable to key cylinder and install holder.
2. Clamp cable and fix to control cable with band.
3. Turn ignition key to lock position.
B
4. Set selector lever to P position.

AT

SCIA1231E

H
5. Insert interlock rod into adjuster holder.
6. Install casing cap to bracket.
7. Move slider in order to fix adjuster holder to interlock rod. I
CAUTION:
Do not touch any adjacent parts of key interlock cable when
slider is being held. J
Insert slider into key interlock rod straightly.

K
SCIA1232E

Revision; 2004 April AT-293 2003 G35 Coupe

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE PFP:00000

Control Valve Assembly ACS004JJ

CAUTION:
When replacing the control valve assembly, erase EEP ROM in TCM. Refer to AT-8, "Precautions for
TCM, A/T Assembly and Control Valve Assembly Replacement" .
COMPONENTS

SCIA3441E

1. Transmission 2. Control valve assembly 3. Bracket

4. Fluid temperature sensor 2 5. Oil pan gasket 6. Oil pan
7. Magnet 8. Drain plug gasket 9. Drain plug
10. Oil pan mounting bolt

REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal
2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.
3. Drain ATF through drain plug.

Revision; 2004 April AT-294 2003 G35 Coupe

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

4. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket.

A

AT

SCIA2308E

D
5. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connectors.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connector. E

G
SCIA4770E

6. Disconnect fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. H

CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connector.
I

SCIA3975E
K
7. Remove terminal cord assembly connectors from bracket.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connector. L

SCIA3977E

8. Disconnect revolution sensor connector.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connector.

SCIA2313E

Revision; 2004 April AT-295 2003 G35 Coupe

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

9. Straighten terminal clips to free terminal cord assembly and rev-

olution sensor harness then remove terminal clips.
CAUTION:
Hang down terminal cord assembly and revolution sensor
harness toward outside so as not to disturb removal of con-
trol valve assembly.

SCIA2314E

10. Remove bolts A, B and C from control valve assembly.

Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts
A 42 (1.65) 5
B 55 (2.17) 6
C 40 (1.57) 1

SCIA2312E

11. Remove control valve assembly from transmission case.

CAUTION:
When removing, be careful with the manual valve notch and
manual plate height. Remove it vertically.

SCIA3984E

12. Remove fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control

valve assembly.

SCIA2582E

13. Remove bracket from fluid temperature sensor 2.

SCIA2583E

Revision; 2004 April AT-296 2003 G35 Coupe

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

INSTALLATION
A
CAUTION:
After completing installation, check fluid leakage and fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Changing A/T Fluid" ,
AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
B
1. Install fluid temperature sensor 2 in bracket.

AT

E
SCIA2813E

2. Install fluid temperature sensor 2 in control valve assembly.

(With bracket.) F
: 7.9 N·m (0.81 kg-m, 70 in-lb)

SCIA2582E
I
3. Install control valve assembly.
a. Install control valve assembly in transmission case.
J

SCIA2315E

M
CAUTION:
● Hang down terminal cord assembly and revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to
disturb installation of control valve assembly.
● Make sure that turbine revolution sensor securely installs turbine revolution sensor hole.

● Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with

manual plate projection.

SCIA2479E

b. Install bolts A, B and C in control valve assembly.

Revision; 2004 April AT-297 2003 G35 Coupe
 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts

A 42 (1.65) 5
B 55 (2.17) 6
C 40 (1.57) 1

SCIA2312E

c. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. After

that tighten them in order (1 → 2 → 3), and then tighten other
bolts.
: 7.9 N·m (0.81 kg-m, 70 in-lb)

SCIA3170E

4. Install terminal cord assembly connectors in bracket.

SCIA3977E

5. Connect terminal cord assembly connectors.

SCIA4770E

6. Connect fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.

SCIA3975E

Revision; 2004 April AT-298 2003 G35 Coupe

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

7. Connect revolution sensor connector.

A

AT

SCIA2313E
D
8. Securely fasten terminal harness with terminal clips.

G
SCIA2314E

9. Install oil pan in transmission case. H

a. Install oil pan gasket in oil pan.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse oil pan gasket. I
● Install it in the direction to align hole positions.

b. Install oil pan (with oil pan gasket) in transmission case. J

CAUTION:
● Install it so that drain plug comes to the position as
shown in the figure.
K
● Be careful not to pinch harnesses.

SCIA2308E
M
c. Tighten oil pan mounting bolts to the specified torque in numeri-
cal order shown in the figure after temporarily tightening them.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse oil pan mounting bolts.
: 7.9 N·m (0.81 kg-m, 70 in-lb)

10. Install drain plug in oil pan.

CAUTION:
Do not reuse drain plug gasket.
SCIA4113E
: 34 N·m (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft-lb)

11. Pour ATF into transmission assembly.

12. Connect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.
13. Connect the negative battery terminal

Revision; 2004 April AT-299 2003 G35 Coupe

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

Rear Oil Seal ACS004KV

REMOVAL
1. Remove exhaust tube with power [Link] to EX-3, "Removal and Installation" .
2. Remove propeller [Link] to PR-4, "Removal and Installation" .
3. Remove rear oil seal using a flat-bladed screwdriver.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch rear extension assembly.

SCIA3428E

INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
After completing installation, check fluid leakage and fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Changing A/T Fluid"
,AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
1. As shown below, use a drift to drive rear oil seal into the exten-
sion until it is flush.
CAUTION:
● Apply ATF to rear oil seal.

● Do not reuse rear oil seal

SCIA5310E

2. Install propeller shaft. Refer to PR-4, "Removal and Installation" .

3. Install exhaust tube. Refer to EX-3, "Removal and Installation" .

Revision; 2004 April AT-300 2003 G35 Coupe

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

Parking Components ACS004KU

COMPONENTS A

AT

SCIA4769E

1. Rear oil seal 2. Terminal bracket 3. Rear extension K

4. Pawl shaft 5. Return spring 6. Parking actuator support
7. Parking pawl 8. Self-sealing bolt 9. Needle bearing
10. Bearing race 11. Output shaft 12. Seal ring L
13. Parking gear

REMOVAL
M
1. Drain ATF through drain plug.
2. Remove exhaust tube with power [Link] to EX-3, "Removal and Installation" .
3. Remove propeller [Link] to PR-4, "Removal and Installation" .
4. Remove tightening bolts for rear extension assembly and termi-
nal bracket.

SCIA3426E

Revision; 2004 April AT-301 2003 G35 Coupe

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

5. Tap rear extension assembly with soft hammer.

SCIA3432E

6. Remove rear extension assembly from transmission case.

SCIA3431E

7. Remove bearing race from output shaft.

SCIA3522E

8. Remove output shaft from transmission case.

SCIA3430E

9. Remove parking gear from output shaft.

10. Remove seal rings from output shaft.

SCIA3521E

Revision; 2004 April AT-302 2003 G35 Coupe

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

11. Remove needle bearing from rear extension.

A
12. Remove parking actuator support from rear extension.

AT

D
SCIA3423E

13. Remove parking pawl, pawl shaft and return spring from rear
extension. E

SCIA3424E
H
14. Remove return spring from parking pawl.

K
SCIA2445E

15. Remove rear oil seal from rear extension. L

CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch rear extension.
M

SCIA3524E

Revision; 2004 April AT-303 2003 G35 Coupe

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
After completing installation, check fluid leakage and fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Changing A/T Fluid"
, AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
1. As shown below, use a drift to drive rear oil seal into the rear
extension until it is flush.
CAUTION:
● Apply ATF to rear oil seal.

● Do not reuse rear oil seal.

SCIA5311E

2. Install return spring in parking pawl.

SCIA2445E

3. Install parking pawl and pawl shaft in rear extension.

SCIA3424E

4. Install parking actuator support in rear extension.

5. Install needle bearing in rear extension.
CAUTION:
Apply petroleum to needle bearing.
6. Install seal rings in out put shaft.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse seal rings.

● Apply petroleum to seal rings.

SCIA3423E

Revision; 2004 April AT-304 2003 G35 Coupe

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

7. Install parking gear in output shaft

A

AT

SCIA3521E

D
8. Install output shaft in transmission case.

G
SCIA3430E

9. Install bearing race in output shaft. H

SCIA3522E
K
10. Apply recommended sealant (Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket
or equivalent. Refer to GI-47, "Recommended Chemical Prod-
ucts and Sealants" .) to rear extension assembly as shown in L
illustration.
CAUTION:
Complete remove all moisture, oil and old sealant, etc. M
From the transmission case and rear extension assembly.

SCIA4773E

11. Install rear extension assembly in transmission case.

SCIA3431E

Revision; 2004 April AT-305 2003 G35 Coupe

 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

12. Tighten rear extension assembly mounting bolts to specified

torque.(Because terminal bracket is tightened together with rear
extension assy before procedure 11)
CAUTION:
Do not reuse self–sealing bolt.
Rear extension mounting bolt
: 52 N·m (5.3 Kg-m, 38 ft-lb)
Self-sealing bolt
: 61 N·m (6.2 Kg-m, 45 ft-lb) SCIA3426E

13. Install propeller shaft. Refer to PR-4, "Removal and Installation"

14. Install exhaust tube. Refer to EX-3, "Removal and Installation" .
15. Install drain plug in oil pan.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse drain plug gasket.
16. Pour ATF into transmission assembly.

Revision; 2004 April AT-306 2003 G35 Coupe

 AIR BREATHER HOSE

AIR BREATHER HOSE PFP:31098

A
Removal and Installation ACS002I9

Refer to the figure below for air breather hose removal and installation procedure.
B

AT

SCIA0860E

CAUTION: H
● When installing an air breather hose, be careful not to be crushed or blocked by folding or bend-
ing the hose.
● When inserting a hose to the transmission tube, be sure to insert it fully until its end reaches the
I
tube bend R portion.

Revision; 2004 April AT-307 2003 G35 Coupe

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY

TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY PFP:31020

Removal and Installation ACS002IA

SCIA3435E

1. Transmission assembly 2. A/T fluid charging pipe 3. O-ring

4. Fluid cooler tube 5. Copper washer 6. Bracket
7. Engine rear member 8. Insulator

REMOVAL
CAUTION:
When removing the A/T assembly from engine, first remove the crankshaft position sensor (POS) from
the A/T assembly.
Be careful not to damage sensor edge.
1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
2. Remove engine under cover with power tool.
3. Remove exhaust tube with power tool. Refer to EX-3, "EXHAUST SYSTEM" .
4. Remove three way catalyst. Refer to EM-22, "Removal and Installation" .
5. Remove propeller shaft. Refer to PR-4, "REAR PROPELLER SHAFT" .
6. Remove A/T control rod. Refer to AT-283, "SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM" .
7. Disconnect A/T solenoid valve harness connectors.

Revision; 2004 April AT-308 2003 G35 Coupe

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY

8. Remove crankshaft position sensor (POS) from A/T assembly.

9. Remove fluid cooler tube and A/T fluid charging pipe. A
10. Plug up openings such as the fluid charging pipe hole, etc.
11. Remove air breather hose. Refer to AT-307, "AIR BREATHER
HOSE" . B
12. Remove starter motor. Refer to SC-10, "STARTING SYSTEM" .
13. Remove dust cover from converter housing part.
AT
14. Turn crankshaft, and remove the four tightening bolts for drive
plate and torque converter.
CAUTION: SCIA0861E

When turning crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed from D

the front of the engine.
15. Support A/T assembly with a transmission jack.
E
CAUTION:
When setting the transmission jack, be careful not to allow it to collide against the drain plug.
16. Remove engine rear member with power tool.
F
17. Remove bolts fixing A/T assembly to engine with power tool.
18. Remove A/T assembly from vehicle with a transmission jack.
● Secure torque converter to prevent it from dropping.
G
● Secure A/T assembly to a transmission jack.

SCIA0499E

INSPECTION J
Installation and Inspection of Torque Converter
● After inserting a torque converter to a transmission, be sure to
check distance A to ensure it is within the reference value limit. K
Distance A : 25.0 mm (0.98 in) or more

SAT017B

INSTALLATION
Install the removed parts in the reverse order of the removal, while paying attention to the following work.
● When installing transmission to the engine, attach the fixing
bolts in accordance with the following standard.
Bolt No. 1 2 3
Number of bolts 1 5 2
Bolt length
55 (2.17) 65 (2.56) 35 (1.38)
“ ”mm (in)
Tightening torque 70 - 80 41.2 - 52.0
N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) (7.2 - 8.1, 52 - 59) (4.2 - 5.3, 31 - 38)

SCIA0903E

Revision; 2004 April AT-309 2003 G35 Coupe

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY

● Align the positions of tightening bolts for drive plate with those of
the torque converter, and temporarily tighten the bolts. Then,
tighten the bolts with the specified torque.
: 51 N·m (5.2 kg-m, 38 ft-lb)

CAUTION:
● When turning crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed from
the front of the engine.
● When tightening the tightening bolts for the torque con-
verter after fixing the crankshaft pulley bolts, be sure to
ATA1292D
confirm the tightening torque of the crankshaft pulley
mounting bolts.
● After converter is installed to drive plate, rotate crankshaft several turns and check to be sure that
transmission rotates freely without binding.
● Install crankshaft position sensor (POS). Refer to EM-26, "OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER" .
● After completing installation, check fluid leakage, fluid level, and the positions of A/T. Refer to AT-13,
"Changing A/T Fluid" , AT-284, "Adjustment of A/T Position" , AT-284, "Checking of A/T Position" .
● When replacing the A/T assembly, erase EEP ROM in TCM. Refer to AT-8, "Precautions for TCM, A/T
Assembly and Control Valve Assembly Replacement" .

Revision; 2004 April AT-310 2003 G35 Coupe

 OVERHAUL

OVERHAUL PFP:00000
A
Components ACS004JK

AT

SCIA4615E

Revision; 2004 April AT-311 2003 G35 Coupe

 OVERHAUL

1. O-ring 2. Oil pump cover 3. O-ring

4. Oil pump housing 5. Self-sealing bolt 6. Torque converter
7. Converter housing 8. Oil pump housing oil seal 9. Bearing race
10. Needle bearing 11. O-ring 12. Front carrier assembly
13. Needle bearing 14. Snap ring 15. Front sun gear
16. 3rd one-way clutch 17. Snap ring 18. Bearing race
19. Needle bearing 20. Seal ring 21. Input clutch assembly
22. Needle bearing 23. Rear internal gear 24. Brake band
25. Mid carrier assembly 26. Needle bearing 27. Bearing race
28. Rear carrier assembly 29. Bearing race 30. Mid sun gear
31. Seal ring 32. Rear sun gear 33. 1st one-way clutch
34. Snap ring 35. Needle bearing 36. High and low reverse clutch hub
37. Snap ring 38. Bearing race 39. Needle bearing

Revision; 2004 April AT-312 2003 G35 Coupe

 OVERHAUL

AT

SCIA3413E

1. High and low reverse clutch assem- 2. Needle bearing 3. Direct clutch assembly
bly
4. Needle bearing 5. Reverse brake dish plate 6. Reverse brake driven plate

Revision; 2004 April AT-313 2003 G35 Coupe

 OVERHAUL

7. N-sprig 8. Snap ring 9. Reverse brake retaining plate

10. Reverse brake drive plate 11. Snap ring 12. Spring retainer
13. Return spring 14. Reverse brake piston 15. D-ring
16. Lip seal

Revision; 2004 April AT-314 2003 G35 Coupe

 OVERHAUL

AT

SCIA4772E

1. Rear oil seal 2. Terminal bracket 3. Rear extension

4. Parking actuator support 5. Return spring 6. Parking pawl
7. Pawl shaft 8. Seal ring 9. Needle bearing

Revision; 2004 April AT-315 2003 G35 Coupe

 OVERHAUL

10. Terminal cord assembly 11. Revolution sensor 12. Parking gear
13. Output shaft 14. Bearing race 15. Needle bearing
16. Manual plate 17. Parking rod 18. Manual shaft oil seal
19. Manual shaft 20. O-ring 21. Band servo anchor end pin
22. Detent spring 23. Spacer 24. Seal ring
25. Transmission case 26. Retaining pin 27. Return spring
28. O-ring 29. Servo assembly 30. Snap ring
31. Control valve assembly 32. Bracket 33. Fluid temperature sensor 2
34. Oil pan gasket 35. Oil pan 36. Magnet
37. Drain plug 38. Drain plug gasket 39. Oil pan mounting bolt

Revision; 2004 April AT-316 2003 G35 Coupe

 OVERHAUL

Oil Channel ACS004JL

AT

SCIA4771E

Revision; 2004 April AT-317 2003 G35 Coupe

 OVERHAUL

Locations of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings, Thrust Washers and Snap

Rings ACS004JM

SCIA3370E

Revision; 2004 April AT-318 2003 G35 Coupe

 DISASSEMBLY

DISASSEMBLY PFP:31020
A
Disassembly ACS004KW

CAUTION:
● Do not disassemble parts behind Drum Support. Refer to AT-15, "Cross-Sectional View" . B
● When replacing the control valve assembly, erase EEP ROM in TCM. Refer to AT-8, "Precautions
for TCM, A/T Assembly and Control Valve Assembly Replacement" .
1. Drain ATF through drain hole. AT
2. Remove torque converter by holding it firmly and turing while
pulling straight out.
D

F
SCIA2297E

3. Check torque converter one-way clutch using check tool as G

shown at figure.
a. Insert check tool into the groove of bearing support built into
one-way clutch outer race. H
b. When fixing bearing support with check tool, rotate one- way
clutch spline using screwdriver.
c. Check that inner race rotates clockwise only. If not, replace I
torque converter assembly.

SCIA3171E

4. Remove converter housing from transmission case.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch converter housing.

SCIA3427E

Revision; 2004 April AT-319 2003 G35 Coupe

 DISASSEMBLY

5. Remove O-ring from input clutch assembly.

SCIA2299E

6. Remove tightening bolts for oil pump assembly and transmis-

sion case.

SCIA2300E

7. Attach sliding hammer to oil pump assembly and extract it

evenly from transmission case.
CAUTION:
● Fully tighten sliding hammer screw.

● Make sure that bearing race is installed to the oil pump

assembly edge surface.

SCIA5474E

Revision; 2004 April AT-320 2003 G35 Coupe

 DISASSEMBLY

8. Remove O-ring from oil pump assembly.

A

AT

SCIA3417E

D
9. Remove bearing race, needle bearing and front sun gear from
transmission case.
NOTE: E
Remove front sun gear by rotating left/right.

G
SCIA3418E

10. Remove seal rings from input clutch assembly. H

SCIA2470E K

11. Remove front carrier assembly from transmission case. (With

input clutch assembly and rear internal gear.) L
CAUTION:
Be careful to remove it with needle bearing.
M

SCIA3419E

Revision; 2004 April AT-321 2003 G35 Coupe

 DISASSEMBLY

12. Loosen lock nut and remove band servo anchor end pin from
transmission case.

SCIA2579E

13. Remove brake band from transmission case.

SCIA2580E

● To prevent brake linings from cracking or peeling, do not

stretch the flexible band unnecessarily. When removing
the brake band, always secure it with a clip as shown in
the figure at left.
Leave the clip in position after removing the brake band.
● Check brake band facing for damage, cracks, wear or
burns.

SAT655

14. Remove mid carrier assembly and rear carrier assembly as a

unit.

SCIA2304E

15. Remove mid carrier assembly from rear carrier assembly.

Revision; 2004 April AT-322 2003 G35 Coupe

 DISASSEMBLY

16. Remove needle bearing (front side) from mid carrier assembly.
A

AT

SCIA2805E

D
17. Remove needle bearing (rear side) from mid carrier assembly.
18. Remove bearing race from rear carrier assembly.
E

G
SCIA2804E

19. Remove needle bearing from rear carrier assembly. H

SCIA2803E
K
20. Remove mid sun gear assembly, rear sun gear assembly and
high and low reverse clutch hub as a unit.
CAUTION: L
Be careful to remove then with bearing race and needle
bearing.
M

SCIA2305E

21. Remove high and low reverse clutch assembly from transmis-
sion case.
CAUTION:
Make sure that needle bearing is installed to the high and
low reverse clutch assembly edge surface.

SCIA2306E

Revision; 2004 April AT-323 2003 G35 Coupe

 DISASSEMBLY

22. Remove direct clutch assembly from transmission case.

23. Remove needle bearing from drum support edge surface.

SCIA2307E

24. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket.

SCIA2308E

25. Check foreign materials in oil pan to help determine causes of

malfunction. If the fluid is very dark, smells burned, or contains
foreign particles, the frictional material (clutches, band) may
need replacement. A tacky film that will not wipe clean indicates
varnish build up. Varnish can cause valves, servo, and clutches
to stick and can inhibit pump pressure.
● If frictional material is detected, replace radiator after
repair of A/T. Refer to CO-12, "RADIATOR" , CO-16,
"RADIATOR (ALUMINUM TYPE)" .

SAT171B

26. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connectors.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connector.

SCIA3412E

Revision; 2004 April AT-324 2003 G35 Coupe

 DISASSEMBLY

27. Disconnect fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.

CAUTION: A
Be careful not to damage connector.

AT

SCIA2581E

D
28. Remove terminal cord assembly connectors from bracket.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connector. E

G
SCIA2584E

29. Disconnect revolution sensor connector. H

CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connector.
I

SCIA2313E K

30. Straighten terminal clips to free terminal cord assembly and rev-
olution sensor harness then remove terminal clips. L
CAUTION:
Hang down terminal cord assembly and revolution sensor
harness toward outside so as not to disturb removal of con-
trol valve assembly. M

SCIA2314E

31. Remove bolts A, B and C from control valve assembly.

Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts
A 42 (1.65) 5
B 55 (2.17) 6
C 40 (1.57) 1

SCIA2312E

Revision; 2004 April AT-325 2003 G35 Coupe

 DISASSEMBLY

32. Remove control valve assembly from transmission case.

CAUTION:
When removing, be careful with the manual valve notch and
manual plate [Link] it vertically.

SCIA2315E

33. Remove fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control

valve assembly.

SCIA2582E

34. Remove bracket from fluid temperature sensor 2.

SCIA2583E

35. Remove tightening bolts for rear extension assembly and trans-
mission case.

SCIA3426E

Revision; 2004 April AT-326 2003 G35 Coupe

 DISASSEMBLY

36. Tap rear extension assembly with soft hammer.

A

AT

SCIA3420E

D
37. Remove rear extension assembly from transmission case. (With
needle bearing)
E

G
SCIA3421E

38. Remove bearing race from output shaft. H

K
SCIA3522E

39. Remove output shaft from transmission case by rotating left/

right. L

SCIA3422E

Revision; 2004 April AT-327 2003 G35 Coupe

 DISASSEMBLY

40. Remove parking gear from output shaft.

SCIA3521E

41. Remove seal rings from output shaft.

42. Remove needle bearing from transmission case.

SCIA2440E

43. Remove revolution sensor from transmission case.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage harness with the edge of case.

SCIA2320E

44. Remove reverse brake snap ring (fixing plate) using 2 flat-
bladed screwdrivers.
NOTE:
Press out snap ring from the transmission case oil pan side gap
using a flat-bladed screwdriver, and remove it using another
screwdriver.

SCIA2321E

Revision; 2004 April AT-328 2003 G35 Coupe

 DISASSEMBLY

45. Remove reverse brake retaining plate, drive plate, driven plate
and dish plate from transmission case. A
CAUTION:
Be careful to remove it with N-spring.
B

AT

SCIA2322E

D
46. Remove snap ring (fixing spring retainer) using a flat-bladed
screwdriver.
E

G
SCIA2323E

47. Remove spring retainer and return spring from transmission H

case.

K
SCIA2324E

48. Remove seal rings from drum support.

L

SCIA3333E

Revision; 2004 April AT-329 2003 G35 Coupe

 DISASSEMBLY

49. Remove reverse brake piston from transmission case.

SCIA2325E

50. Remove lip seal and D-ring from reverse brake piston.

SCIA2795E

51. Remove terminal cord assembly connectors from bracket.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connector.

SCIA2326E

52. Remove terminal cord assembly from transmission case.

SCIA2327E

Revision; 2004 April AT-330 2003 G35 Coupe

 DISASSEMBLY

53. Use a pin punch (4mm dia. commercial service tool) to knock
out retaining pin. A

AT

SCIA2328E

D
54. Remove manual shaft retaining pin with nippers.
55. Remove manual plate (with parking rod) from manual shaft.
E
56. Remove parking rod from manual plate.
57. Remove manual shaft from transmission case.
F

G
SCIA2329E

58. Remove manual shaft oil seal using a flat-bladed screwdriver. H

CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch transmission case.
I

K
SCIA2331E

59. Remove detent spring and spacer from transmission case.

L

SCIA2332E

Revision; 2004 April AT-331 2003 G35 Coupe

 DISASSEMBLY

60. Using snap ring pliers, Remove snap ring from transmission
case.

SCIA2333E

61. Remove servo assembly (with return spring) from transmission

case.
62. Remove return spring from servo assembly.
63. Remove O-rings from servo assembly.

SCIA2334E

64. Remove parking actuator support from rear extension.

SCIA3423E

65. Remove parking pawl, pawl shaft and return spring from rear
extension.

SCIA3424E

Revision; 2004 April AT-332 2003 G35 Coupe

 DISASSEMBLY

66. Remove return spring from parking pawl.

A

AT

SCIA2445E

D
67. Remove needle bearing from rear extension.
68. Remove rear oil seal from rear extension.
CAUTION: E
Be careful not to scratch rear extension.

SCIA3524E

Revision; 2004 April AT-333 2003 G35 Coupe

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS PFP:00000

Oil Pump ACS004JO

COMPONENTS

SCIA2835E

1. O-ring 2. Oil pump cover 3. O-ring

4. Oil pump housing 5. Oil pump housing oil seal

DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove oil pump housing from oil pump cover.

SCIA2836E

2. Remove oil pump housing oil seal using a flat-bladed screw-

driver.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch oil pump housing.

SCIA2840E

Revision; 2004 April AT-334 2003 G35 Coupe

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

3. Remove O-ring from oil pump housing.

A

AT

SCIA2841E

D
4. Remove O-ring from oil pump cover.

G
SCIA2837E

ASSEMBLY H
1. Install O-ring in oil pump cover.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse O-ring. I
● Apply ATF to O-ring.

K
SCIA2837E

2. Install O-ring in oil pump housing. L

CAUTION:
● Do not reuse O-ring.

● Apply ATF to O-ring.

M

SCIA2841E

Revision; 2004 April AT-335 2003 G35 Coupe

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

3. Install oil seal in oil pump housing.

CAUTION:
● Do not reuse oil seal.

● Apply ATF to oil seal.

SCIA5313E

4. Install oil pump housing in oil pump cover.

: 9.0 N·m (0.92 kg-m, 80 in-lb.)

SCIA2836E

Front Sun Gear, 3rd One-Way Clutch ACS004JP

COMPONENTS

SCIA3114E

1. Front sun gear 2. 3rd one-way clutch 3. Snap ring

Revision; 2004 April AT-336 2003 G35 Coupe

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

DISASSEMBLY
1. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, remove snap ring from front sun A
gear.

AT

SCIA3110E
D

2. Remove 3rd one-way clutch from front sun gear.

E

SCIA3111E

H
INSPECTION
3rd One-Way Clutch
● Check frictional surface for wear or damage. I
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the 3rd one-way clutch.
J
Front Sun Gear Snap Ring
● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.
CAUTION: K
If necessary, replace the snap ring.
Front Sun Gear
● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. L
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the front sun gear.
ASSEMBLY M
1. Install 3rd one-way clutch in front sun gear.
CAUTION:
Apply ATF to 3rd one-way clutch.

SCIA3111E

Revision; 2004 April AT-337 2003 G35 Coupe

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

2. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, install snap ring in front sun

gear.

SCIA3110E

3. Check operation of 3rd one-way clutch.

a. Hold oil pump assembly and turn front sun gear.
b. Check 3rd one-way clutch for correct locking and unlocking
directions.
CAUTION:
If not as shown in illustration, check installation direction of
3rd one-way clutch.

SCIA3131E

Revision; 2004 April AT-338 2003 G35 Coupe

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

Front Carrier, Input Clutch, Rear Internal Gear ACS004JQ

COMPONENTS A

AT

SCIA3043E

1. Seal ring 2. O-ring 3. Needle bearing

4. Bearing race 5. Front carrier assembly 6. Needle bearing
7. Snap ring 8. Snap ring 9. Retaining plate
10. Driven plate 11. Input clutch drum 12. Drive plate
13. Rear internal gear

Revision; 2004 April AT-339 2003 G35 Coupe

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove front carrier assembly from rear internal gear.

SCIA2844E

a. Remove bearing race from front carrier.

SCIA2847E

b. Remove needle bearing from front carrier.

SCIA2848E

c. Remove snap ring from front carrier.

SCIA2852E

Revision; 2004 April AT-340 2003 G35 Coupe

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

2. Remove input clutch assembly from rear internal gear.

a. Remove O-ring and seal rings from input clutch assembly. A

AT

SCIA2849E

D
b. Remove needle bearing from input clutch assembly.

G
SCIA2853E

c. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, remove snap ring from input H

clutch drum.
d. Remove drive plate, driven plate and retaining plate from input
clutch drum.
I

SCIA2864E
K
INSPECTION
Front Carrier Snap Ring
● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. L
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the snap ring.
M
Input Clutch Snap Ring
● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the input clutch assembly.
Input Clutch Drum
● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage or burns.
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the input clutch assembly.
Input Clutch Drive Plates
● Check facing for burns, cracks or damage.
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the input clutch assembly.
Input Clutch Retaining Plates and Driven Plates
● Check facing for burns, cracks or damage.

Revision; 2004 April AT-341 2003 G35 Coupe

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the input clutch assembly.
Front Carrier
● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the front carrier assembly.
Rear Internal Gear
● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the rear internal gear assembly.
ASSEMBLY
1. Install input clutch.
a. Install drive plate, driven plate and retaining plate in input clutch drum.
b. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, install snap ring in input clutch
drum.

SCIA2864E

c. Install needle bearing in input clutch assembly.

CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.
d. Install O-ring and seal rings in input clutch assembly.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse O-ring and seal rings.

● Apply ATF to O-ring.

● Apply petroleum jelly to seal rings.

SCIA2853E

2. Install input clutch assembly in rear internal gear.

SCIA2849E

3. Install front carrier assembly.

Revision; 2004 April AT-342 2003 G35 Coupe

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

a. Install snap ring in front carrier.

A

AT

SCIA2852E

D
b. Install needle bearing in front carrier.
CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing. E

G
SCIA2848E

c. Install bearing race in front carrier. H

CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to bearing race.
I

SCIA2847E
K
d. Install front carrier assembly in input clutch and rear internal
gear.
L

SCIA2850E

Revision; 2004 April AT-343 2003 G35 Coupe

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

Mid Sun Gear, Rear Sun Gear, High and Low Reverse Clutch Hub ACS004JR

COMPONENTS

SCIA2851E

1. Needle bearing 2. Bearing race 3. Snap ring

4. High and low reverse clutch hub 5. Needle bearing 6. Snap ring
7. 1st one-way clutch 8. Rear sun gear 9. Seal ring
10. Mid sun gear

DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove needle bearing and bearing race.

SCIA2854E

2. Using a snap ring pliers, remove snap ring from high and low
reverse clutch hub.

SCIA2855E

Revision; 2004 April AT-344 2003 G35 Coupe

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

3. Remove high and low reverse clutch hub from mid sun gear
assembly. A

AT

SCIA2856E

D
a. Remove needle bearing from high and low reverse clutch hub.

G
SCIA2857E

4. Remove rear sun gear assembly from mid sun gear assembly. H

SCIA2858E K

a. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, remove snap ring from rear sun

gear. L

SCIA2859E

Revision; 2004 April AT-345 2003 G35 Coupe

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

b. Remove 1st one-way clutch from rear sun gear.

SCIA2860E

5. Remove seal rings from mid sun gear.

SCIA2861E

INSPECTION
High and Low Reverse Clutch Hub Snap Ring, Rear Sun Gear Snap Ring
● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the snap ring.
1st One-Way Clutch
● Check frictional surface for wear or damage.
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the 1st one-way clutch.
Mid Sun Gear
● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.
CAUTION:
Replace mid sun gear assembly and high and low reverse clutch assembly as a set if necessary.
Rear Sun Gear
● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the rear sun gear.
High and Low Reverse Clutch Hub
● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.
CAUTION:
If necessary, replace the rear sun gear.

Revision; 2004 April AT-346 2003 G35 Coupe

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

ASSEMBLY
1. Install seal rings from mid sun gear. A
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse seal rings.

● Apply petroleum jelly to seal rings. B

AT

SCIA2861E
D

2. Install 1st one-way clutch in rear sun gear.

CAUTION: E
Apply petroleum jelly to 1st one-way clutch.

SCIA2860E

H
3. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, install snap ring in rear sun
gear.
I

K
SCIA2859E

4. Install rear sun gear assembly in mid sun gear assembly.

L

SCIA2858E

Revision; 2004 April AT-347 2003 G35 Coupe

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

5. Install needle bearing in high and low reverse clutch hub.

CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.

SCIA2857E

6. Install high and low reverse clutch hub in mid sun gear assem-
bly.

SCIA2856E

7. Using a snap ring pliers, install snap ring in high and low reverse
clutch hub.

SCIA2855E

8. Check operation of 1st one-way clutch.

a. Hold mid sun gear and turn rear sun gear.
b. Check 1st one-way clutch for correct locking and unlocking
directions.
CAUTION:
If not as shown in illustration, check installation direction of
1st one-way clutch.

SCIA3132E

Revision; 2004 April AT-348 2003 G35 Coupe

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

9. Install needle bearing and bearing race.

CAUTION: A
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing and bearing race.

AT

SCIA2854E

D
High and Low Reverse Clutch ACS004JS

COMPONENTS
E

SCIA2865E

1. High and low reverse clutch drum 2. Driven plate 3. Retaining plate K
4. Snap ring 5. Drive plate

DISASSEMBLY
L
1. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, remove snap ring from high and
low reverse clutch drum.
2. Remove drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate from high
and low reverse clutch drum. M

SCIA2868E

INSPECTION
● Check the following, and replace high and low reverse clutch assembly and mid sun gear assem-
bly as a set if necessary.
High and Low Reverse Clutch Snap Ring
● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.
High and Low Reverse Clutch Drive Plates
● Check facing for burns, cracks or damage.

Revision; 2004 April AT-349 2003 G35 Coupe

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

High and Low Reverse Clutch Retaining Plates and Driven Plates
● Check facing for burns, cracks or damage.
ASSEMBLY
1. Install drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate in high and low reverse clutch drum.
2. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, install snap ring in high and low
reverse clutch drum.

SCIA2868E
3.

Direct Clutch ACS004JT

COMPONENTS

SCIA2867E

1. Direct clutch drum 2. Driven plate 3. Retaining plate

4. Snap ring 5. Drive plate

DISASSEMBLY
1. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, remove snap ring from direct
clutch drum.
2. Remove drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate from
direct clutch drum.

SCIA2868E

INSPECTION
● Check the following, and replace direct clutch assembly if necessary.
Direct Clutch Snap Ring
● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.

Revision; 2004 April AT-350 2003 G35 Coupe

 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

Direct Clutch Drive Plates

● Check facing for burns, cracks or damage. A

Direct Clutch Retaining Plates and Driven Plates

● Check facing for burns, cracks or damage. B
ASSEMBLY
1. Install drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate in direct clutch drum.
2. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, install snap ring in direct clutch AT
drum.

SCIA2868E
F

Revision; 2004 April AT-351 2003 G35 Coupe

 ASSEMBLY

ASSEMBLY PFP:00000

Assembly (1) ACS004KX

1. As shown below, use a drift (commercial service tool φ22) to

drive manual shaft oil seal into the transmission case until it is
flush.
CAUTION:
● Apply ATF to manual shaft oil seal.

● Do not reuse manual shaft oil seal.

SCIA2423E

2. Install detent spring and spacer in transmission case.

SCIA2332E

3. Assemble manual shaft, manual plate, and parking rod after installing manual shaft to transmission case.
4. Install retaining pin into the manual plate and manual shaft.
a. Fit pinhole of the manual plate to pinhole of the manual shaft with a pin punch.
b. Use a hammer to tap the retaining pin into the manual plate.
CAUTION:
● Drive retaining pin to 2±0.5 mm over the manual
plate.
● Do not reuse retaining pin.

SCIA3172E

5. Install retaining pin into the transmission case and manual shaft.
a. Fit pinhole of the transmission case to pinhole of the manual shaft with a pin punch.
b. Use a hammer to tap the retaining pin into the transmission
case.
CAUTION:
● Drive retaining pin to 5±1 mm over the transmis-
sion case.
● Do not reuse retaining pin.

SCIA2427E

Revision; 2004 April AT-352 2003 G35 Coupe

 ASSEMBLY

6. Install terminal cord assembly in transmission case.

CAUTION: A
Apply petroleum jelly to O-ring.

AT

SCIA2428E

D
7. Install terminal cord assembly connectors in bracket.

G
SCIA2326E

8. Install O-rings in servo assembly. H

CAUTION:
Do not reuse O-rings.
Apply petroleum jelly to O-rings.
I
9. Install return spring in servo assembly.
10. Install servo assembly in transmission case.
J

SCIA2334E

11. Using snap ring pliers, install snap ring in transmission case. M

SCIA2333E

Revision; 2004 April AT-353 2003 G35 Coupe

 ASSEMBLY

12. Install lip seal and D-ring in reverse brake piston.

CAUTION:
● Do not reuse lip seal and D-ring.

● Apply petroleum jelly to lip seal.

● Apply ATF to D-ring.

SCIA2795E

13. Install reverse brake piston in transmission case.

SCIA2325E

14. Install seal rings in drum support.

CAUTION:
● Do not reuse seal rings.

● Apply petroleum jelly to seal rings.

SCIA3333E

15. Install needle bearing in transmission case.

CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.

SCIA2796E

Revision; 2004 April AT-354 2003 G35 Coupe

 ASSEMBLY

16. After installing the return spring and spring retainer in transmis-
sion case, use a clutch spring compressor to install snap ring in A
transmission case.
CAUTION:
Securely assemble them using a flat-bladed screwdriver so B
that snap ring tension is slightly weak.

AT

SCIA5314E

D
17. Install reverse brake retaining plate, drive plate, driven plate and
dish plate in transmission case.
E

G
SCIA2322E

18. Assemble N-spring. H

SCIA3179E

19. Install snap ring in transmission case.

SCIA2439E

Revision; 2004 April AT-355 2003 G35 Coupe

 ASSEMBLY

20. Measure clearance between retaining plate and snap ring. If not
within specified clearance, select proper retaining plate.
Specified clearance “A”:
Standard: 0.7 - 1.1mm (0.028 - 0.043 in)
Retaining plate:
Refer to AT-373, "Reverse Brake" .

SCIA3129E

21. Install needle bearing in transmission case.

CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.

SCIA2440E

22. Install revolution sensor in transmission case.

SCIA2320E

23. As shown below, use a drift to drive rear oil seal into the exten-
sion until it is flush.
CAUTION:
● Apply ATF to rear oil seal.

● Do not reuse rear oil seal.

SCIA5311E

24. Install return spring in parking pawl.

SCIA2445E

Revision; 2004 April AT-356 2003 G35 Coupe

 ASSEMBLY

25. Install parking pawl and pawl shaft in rear extension.

A

AT

SCIA3424E

D
26. Install parking actuator support in rear extension.

G
SCIA3423E

27. Install seal rings in output shaft. H

CAUTION:
● Do not reuse seal rings.

● Apply petroleum jelly to seal rings.

I
28. Install parking gear in output shaft.

L
SCIA3521E

29. Install output shaft in transmission case.

M
CAUTION:
Be careful not to mistake front for rear because both sides
looks similar. (Thinner end is front side.)

SCIA3422E

Revision; 2004 April AT-357 2003 G35 Coupe

 ASSEMBLY

30. Install bearing race in output shaft.

31. Install needle bearing in output shaft.
CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.

SCIA3522E

32. Apply recommended sealant (Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket

or equivalent. Refer to GI-47, "Recommended Chemical Prod-
ucts and Sealants" .) to rear extension assy as shown in illustra-
tion.
CAUTION:
Complete remove all moisture, oil and old sealant, etc.
From the transmission case and rear extension mounting
surfaces.

SCIA2450E

33. Install rear extension assembly in transmission case.

SCIA3421E

34. Tighten rear extension assembly mounting bolts to specified

torque. (Because terminal bracket is tightened together with out-
put shaft & companion flange, it should be installed before pro-
cedure 33.)
CAUTION:
Do not reuse self-sealing bolt.
Rear extension assy mounting bolt:
: 52 N·m (5.3 kg-m, 38 ft-lb)
Self-sealing bolt:
SCIA3426E
: 61 N·m (6.2 kg-m, 45 ft-lb)

Revision; 2004 April AT-358 2003 G35 Coupe

 ASSEMBLY

35. Install direct clutch assembly in transmission case.

CAUTION: A
Make sure that drum support edge surface and direct clutch
inner boss edge surface come to almost same place.
36. Install needle bearing in high and low reverse clutch drum. B
CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.
AT

SCIA2307E

D
37. Install high and low reverse clutch assembly in transmission
case.
CAUTION: E
Be sure to replace high and low reverse clutch and mid sun
gear as a set.
F

G
SCIA2306E

38. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, range the drive plate. H

SCIA3169E
K
39. Install high and low reverse clutch hub, mid sun gear assembly
and rear sun gear assembly in transmission case.
L

SCIA2305E

Revision; 2004 April AT-359 2003 G35 Coupe

 ASSEMBLY

CAUTION:
Check that portion A of high and low reverse clutch drum
protrudes approximately 2 mm (0.08 in) beyond portion B of
rear sun gear.

SCIA3130E

40. Install needle bearing in rear carrier assembly.

CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.
41. Install bearing race in rear carrier assembly.
CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to bearing race.

SCIA2803E

42. Install rear carrier assembly in transmission case.

SCIA2462E

43. Install needle bearing (rear side) in mid carrier assembly.

CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.

SCIA2804E

Revision; 2004 April AT-360 2003 G35 Coupe

 ASSEMBLY

44. Install needle bearing (front side) in mid carrier assembly.

CAUTION: A
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.

AT

SCIA2805E

D
45. Install mid carrier assembly in transmission case.

G
SCIA2304E

46. Install front carrier assembly in transmission case. (With input H

clutch assembly and rear internal gear.)

SCIA3419E
K
47. Install seal rings in input clutch assembly.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse seal rings.
L
● Apply petroleum jelly to seal rings.

SCIA2470E

48. Install band servo anchor end pin and lock nut in transmission
case.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse band servo anchor end pin.

SCIA2579E

Revision; 2004 April AT-361 2003 G35 Coupe

 ASSEMBLY

49. Install brake band in transmission case.

CAUTION:
Assemble it so that identification to avoid incorrect installa-
tion faces servo side.

SCIA5498E

50. Install front sun gear in transmission case.

CAUTION:
Apply ATF to front sun gear bushing and one-way clutch
end bearing.

SCIA3418E

51. Install needle bearing in front sun gear.

CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.

SCIA2808E

52. Adjust brake band tilting using clips so that brake band contacts
front sun gear drum evenly.

SCIA2473E

53. Adjust brake band.

a. Loosen lock nut.
b. Tighten band servo anchor end pin to specified torque.
: 5.0 N·m (0.51 kg-m, 44 in-lb)

c. Back of band servo anchor end pin three turns.

d. While band servo anchor end pin, tighten lock nut to specified
torque.

SCIA5498E

Revision; 2004 April AT-362 2003 G35 Coupe

 ASSEMBLY

Adjustment ACS004KY

TOTAL END PLAY A

● Measure clearance between front sun gear and needle bearing
for oil pump cover.
● Select proper thickness of bearing race so that end play is within B
specifications.

AT

D
SCIA2810E

1. Measure dimensions “K” and “L” and then calculate dimension E

“J”.

SCIA3121E H

a. Measure dimension “K”.

I

SCIA3122E
L
b. Measure dimension “L”.
c. Calculate dimension “J”.
“J”: Distance between oil pump fitting surface of M
transmission case and needle bearing mating surface
of front sun gear.
J=K–L

SCIA3123E

Revision; 2004 April AT-363 2003 G35 Coupe

 ASSEMBLY

2. Measure dimensions “M1 ” and “M2 ” and then calculate dimen-

sion “M”.

SCIA3125E

a. Place bearing race and needle bearing on oil pump assembly.

SCIA3124E

b. Measure thickness of straightedge “M1 ”.

SCIA3126E

c. Measure thickness of straightedge “M2 ”.

d. Calculate dimension “M”.
“M”: Distance between trans mission case fitting sur-
face of oil pump and needle bearing on oil pump.
M = M1 – M2

SCIA3127E

3. Adjust total end play “T1 ”.

T1 = J – M
Total end play “T1 ”:
0.25 - 0.55 mm (0.0098 - 0.0217 in)
● Select proper thickness of bearing race so that total end play is within specifications.
Bearing races: Refer to AT-373, "BEARING RACE FOR ADJUSTING TOTAL
END PLAY" .

Revision; 2004 April AT-364 2003 G35 Coupe

 ASSEMBLY

Assembly (2) ACS004KZ

A
CAUTION:
When replacing the control valve assembly, erase EEP ROM in TCM. Refer to AT-8, "Precautions for
TCM, A/T Assembly and Control Valve Assembly Replacement" .
1. Install O-ring in oil pump assembly. B
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse O-ring.
AT
● Apply ATF to O-ring.

2. Install bearing race in oil pump assembly.

CAUTION:
D
Apply petroleum jelly to bearing race.
3. Install oil pump assembly in transmission case.
CAUTION: E
Apply ATF to oil pump bush.

SCIA2811E

4. Apply recommended sealant (Genuine RTV silicone sealant or H

equivalent. Refer to GI-47, "Recommended Chemical Products
and Sealants" .) to oil pump assembly as shown in illustration.
CAUTION: I
Complete remove all moisture, oil and old sealant, etc.
From the oil pump mounting bolts and oil pump mounting
bolt mounting surfaces. J

K
SCIA4628E

5. Tighten oil pump mounting bolts to specified torque.

CAUTION: L
Apply ATF to oil pump bushing.

SCIA2300E

Revision; 2004 April AT-365 2003 G35 Coupe

 ASSEMBLY

6. Install O-ring in input clutch assembly.

CAUTION:
● Do not reuse O-ring.

● Apply ATF to O-ring.

SCIA2299E

7. Install converter housing in transmission case.

CAUTION:
Do not reuse self-sealing bolt.
Converter housing mounting bolt:
: 52 N·m (5.3 kg-m, 38 ft-lb)
Self-sealing bolt:
: 61 N·m (6.2 kg-m, 45 ft-lb)

SCIA3427E

8. Make sure that brake band does not close turbine revolution
sensor hole.

SCIA2479E

9. Install fluid temperature sensor 2 in bracket.

SCIA2813E

10. Install fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve

assembly.

SCIA2582E

Revision; 2004 April AT-366 2003 G35 Coupe

 ASSEMBLY

11. Install control valve assembly.

a. Install control valve assembly in transmission case. A

AT

SCIA2315E
D

CAUTION:
● Hang down terminal cord assembly and revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to E
disturb installation of control valve assembly.
● Make sure that turbine sensor securely installs turbine sensor hole.

● Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with F

manual plate projection.

SCIA2812E
I

b. Install bolts A, B and C in control valve assembly.

J
Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts
A 42 (1.65) 5
B 55 (2.17) 6 K
C 40 (1.57) 1

SCIA2312E M
c. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. After
that tighten them in order (1 → 2 → 3), and then tighten other
bolts.
: 7.9 N·m (0.81 kg-m, 70 in-lb)

SCIA3170E

Revision; 2004 April AT-367 2003 G35 Coupe

 ASSEMBLY

12. Install terminal cord assembly connectors in bracket.

SCIA2584E

13. Connect terminal cord assembly connectors.

SCIA3412E

14. Connect fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.

SCIA2581E

15. Connect revolution sensor connector.

SCIA2313E

16. Securely fasten terminal harness with clip.

SCIA2314E

Revision; 2004 April AT-368 2003 G35 Coupe

 ASSEMBLY

17. Install oil pan in transmission case.

A
a. Install oil pan gasket in oil pan.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse oil pan gasket.
B
● Install it in the direction to align hole positions.

b. Install oil pan (with oil pan gasket) in transmission case.

CAUTION: AT
● Install it so that drain plug comes to the position as
shown in the figure.
● Be careful not to pinch harnesses. D

SCIA2308E

F
c. Tighten oil pan mounting bolts to the specified torque in numeri-
cal order shown in the figure after temporarily tightening them.
CAUTION: G
Do not reuse oil pan mounting bolts.
18. Install drain plug in oil pan.
CAUTION: H
Do not reuse drain plug gasket.

I
SCIA2492E

19. Install torque converter. J

a. Pour ATF into torque converter.
● Approximately 2 liter (2-1/8 US qt, 1-3/4 Imp qt) of fluid is
required for a new torque converter. K
● When reusing old torque converter, add the same amount
of fluid as was drained.
L

M
SAT428DA

b. Install torque converter while aligning notches of torque con-

verter with notches of oil pump.

SCIA2297E

Revision; 2004 April AT-369 2003 G35 Coupe

 ASSEMBLY

c. Measure distance “A” to check that torque converter is in proper

position.
Distance “A”:
: 25.0 mm (0.98 in) or more

SAT017B

Revision; 2004 April AT-370 2003 G35 Coupe

 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) PFP:00030

A
General Specifications ACS002IB

Applied model VQ35DE engine

Automatic transmission model RE5R05A B
Transmission model code number 90X17,91X18
Stall torque ratio 2.0 : 1
AT
1st 3.540
2nd 2.264
3rd 1.417 D
Transmission gear ratio
4th 1.000
5th 0.834
E
Reverse 2.370
Recommended fluid Nissan Matic Fluid J*1
Fluid capacity 10.3 liter (10-7/8 US qt, 9-1/8 Imp qt) F
CAUTION:
● Use only Nissan Genuine ATF Matic Fluid J. Do not mix with other fluid.

● Using automatic transmission fluid other than Nissan Genuine ATF Matic Fluid J will deteriorate in driveability and auto- G
matic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the warranty.
*1: Refer to MA-9, "Fluids and Lubricants" .
H
Vehicle Speed When Shifting Gears ACS002IC

Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)

Throttle position
D1 →D2 D2 →D3 D3 →D4 D4 →D5 D5 →D4 D4 →D3 D3 →D2 D2 →D1 I
58 - 62 90 - 98 140 - 150 201 - 211 197 - 207 122 - 132 74 - 82 34 - 48
Full throttle
(36 - 39) (56 - 61) (87 - 93) (125 - 131) (122 - 129) (76 - 83) (46 - 51) (23 - 25)
46 - 50 71 - 79 107 - 117 135 - 145 88 - 98 63 - 73 29 - 37 11 - 15 J
Half throttle
(29 - 31) (44 - 49) (66 - 73) (84 - 90) (55 - 61) (39 - 45) (18 - 23) (7 - 9)
● At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening.
K
Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing Complete Lock-Up ACS002ID

Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)

Throttle position L
Lock-up “ON” Lock-up “OFF”
Closed throttle 56 - 64 (35 - 40) 53 - 61 (33 - 38)
Half throttle 168 - 176 (104 - 109) 131 - 139 (81 - 86)
M
● At closed throttle, the accelerator opening is less than 1/8 condition.
● At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening.

Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing Slip Lock-Up ACS002IE

Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)

Throttle position Gear position
Slip lock-up “ON” Slip lock-up “OFF”
4th 37 - 45 (23 - 28) 34 - 42 (21 - 26)
Closed throttle
5th 44 - 52 (27 - 32) 41 - 49 (25 - 30)

● At closed throttle, the accelerator opening is less than 1/8 condition.

Stall Speed ACS002IF

Stall speed 2,600 - 2,900 rpm

Revision; 2004 April AT-371 2003 G35 Coupe

 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

Line Pressure ACS002IG

Line pressure kPa (kg/cm2 , psi)

Engine speed
R position D, M positions
idle speed 392 - 441 (4.0 - 4.5, 57 - 64) 373 - 422 (3.8 - 4.3, 54 - 61)
stall speed 1,700 - 1,890 (17.3 - 19.3, 247 - 274) 1,310 - 1,500 (13.3 - 15.3, 190 - 218)

Solenoid Valves ACS002IH

Name Resistance (Approx.) (Ω) Terminal No.

Line pressure solenoid valve 7
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve 8
Input clutch solenoid valve 6
3-9
High & low reverse clutch solenoid valve 3
Front brake solenoid valve 5
Direct clutch solenoid valve 4
Low coast brake solenoid valve 20 - 40 2

A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor ACS002II

Name Condition CONSULT-II “DATA MONITOR” (Approx.) (V) Resistance (Approx.) (kΩ)
0°C (32°F) 2.2 15
A/T fluid temperature sensor 1 20°C (68°F) 1.8 6.5
80°C (176°F) 0.6 0.9
0°C (32°F) 2.2 10
A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 20°C (68°F) 1.7 4
80°C (176°F) 0.45 0.5

Turbine Revolution Sensor ACS002IJ

Name Condition Data (Approx.)

When running at 50 km/h (31 MPH) in 4th speed with the closed throttle position switch
Turbine revolution “OFF”, use the CONSULT-II pulse frequency measuring function.
sensor 1 CAUTION:
Connect the diagnosis data link connector to the vehicle diagnosis connector.
1.3 (kHz)
When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH) in 1st speed with the closed throttle position switch
Turbine revolution “OFF”, use the CONSULT-II pulse frequency measuring function.
sensor 2 CAUTION:
Connect the diagnosis data link connector to the vehicle diagnosis connector.

Vehicle Speed Sensor A/T (Revolution Sensor) ACS002IK

Name Condition Data (Approx.)

When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH), use the CONSULT-II pulse frequency measuring
function.
Revolution sensor 185 (Hz)
CAUTION:
Connect the diagnosis data link connector to the vehicle diagnosis connector.

Revision; 2004 April AT-372 2003 G35 Coupe

 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

Reverse Brake ACS004JX

A
Thickness mm (in) Part number*
4.2 (0.165) 31667-90X14
4.4 (0.173) 31667-90X15
Thickness of retaining plates B
4.6 (0.181) 31667-90X16
4.8 (0.189) 31667-90X17
5.0 (0.197) 31667-90X18
5.2 (0.205) 31667-90X19 AT
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.

Total End Play ACS004JY

D
Total end play mm (in) 0.25 - 0.55 (0.0098 - 0.0217)

BEARING RACE FOR ADJUSTING TOTAL END PLAY E

Thickness mm (in) Part number*
1.2 (0.047) 31435-90X02
1.4 (0.055) 31435-90X03 F
1.6 (0.063) 31435-90X04
1.8 (0.071) 31435-90X05
2.0 (0.079) 31435-90X06
G
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.

Revision; 2004 April AT-373 2003 G35 Coupe

 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

Revision; 2004 April AT-374 2003 G35 Coupe